植树问题课件

植树问题课件收藏十一篇。

学生们有一个生动有趣的课堂，离不开老师辛苦准备的教案，需要大家认真编写每份教案课件。 教案课件的准备，是新老师为了让课堂教学更加有趣。以下是幼儿教师教育网小编为您收集的最新有关“植树问题课件”的范文，欢迎大家查阅参考资料扩展自己的知识库！

植树问题课件 篇1

1、使学生通过生活中的事例，初步体会解决植树问题的思想方法。

2、初步培养学生从实际问题中探索规律、找出解决问题的有效方法的能力。

3、让学生感受数学在日常生活中的广泛应用，尝试用数学的方法来解决实际生活中的简单问题，培养学生的应用意识和解决实际问题的能力。

数学广角植树问题（一）

第一课时教学内容：

教科书第117页118页的例1、例2

1、利用学生熟悉的生活情境，通过动手操作的实践活动，让学生感悟分的段数与植树棵树之间的关系。

2、通过小组合作、交流、使学生能理解段数与植树棵树之间的规律。

3、通过实践活动激发热爱数学的情感，感受日常生活中处处有数学，体验学习成功的喜悦。

教具：

挂图、直尺

一、创设情境，引入课题

1、每位小朋友都有一双灵巧的小手，它不但会写字，画画、干活，在它里面还藏着有趣的数学知识，你想了解它吗？请举起你的右手，请每一位学生高举起右手，并将五指伸直，关拢。

师：现在请每位小朋友将五指张开，数一数，张开后有几个空格？（4个）

师：在数学上，我们把这个空格叫间隔。刚才，我们把五指张开，有4个空格，也就是4个间隔。

2、举例说出生活中的间隔到处可见，比如：在马路边种树，每两棵树之间有一段距离，我们就把这一段距离叫做一个间隔，楼梯、锯木头等。

3、大家清楚地看到，5个手指之间有4个间隔，那么，将手指换成小树，5棵小树之间有几个间隔（4个），6棵呢？7棵呢？

今天，我们就来学习有趣的植树问题。

（一）出示：在全长100米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（两端要栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

1）同桌相互讨论。

2）有线段图表示你的方法

3）学生汇报

4）引导总结：

两端要栽的时候，比较间隔数和棵数，你得出什么规律？（生：棵树比间隔数多1）

你能用一个式子表示两端都栽的棵数和间隔数的关系吗？

板书：棵数=间隔数+1

5）在线段图上，又有怎样的关系呢？

点数=间隔数+1

6）这个问题应是：1005=20（个）间隔数

20+1=21（棵）棵数

巩固练习

（一）书第118页的做一做独立完成，指名反馈。

（二）出示：大象馆和猩猩馆相距60米。绿化队要在两馆间的小路两旁栽树，相邻两棵树之间的距离是3米，一共要栽几棵树？

1）读题，理解题。

2）分组看图讨论。

3）尝试列式计算。

4）交流：603=200间隔数

两端不栽树：20－1=19（棵）

192=38（棵）

5）质疑：

为什么减1？为什么乘2？

比较例1与例2的不同？小组讨论，再交流

例1两端要栽树，所以棵数比间隔大1：例2两端不栽树，所以棵数比间隔少1。

巩固练习二：

教科书第119页做一做1、2题

学生独立完成，集体反馈。

三、本课小结：

通过今天的学习，你有什么收获？

植树问题课件 篇2

一、教材概述

二、教学目标（知识与技能、过程与方法、情感态度与价值观）

1、使学生理解并掌握一个封闭图形的植树问题的规律。

2、学会用不同的方法分析具体的数学问题。

3、经历数学问题的探究过程，体验用不同的思路解决问题的方法。

4、沟通数学知识与生活之间的密切联系，激发学生的学习兴趣，培养学生的动手操作能力，发展学生的发散思维。

三、学习者特征分析

学生已经初步掌握关于一条线段的植树问题，但是，这个内容学生理解起来还是比较困难，特别是中下的学生。因此，在这基础之上，要让学生借助围棋盘，动手摆一摆，通过小组合作来一起探讨封闭曲线中的植树问题。

四、教学策略选择与设计

自主探索 合作交流 总结规律

五、教学环境及资源准备

投影仪，每小组一副围棋。

六、教学过程

教学过程教师活动预设学生行为设计意图及资源准备

一、创设情境教师投影出示教材第120页例3情境图。

教师：图上两位小朋友在干什么？（下围棋）

你对围棋有哪些了解？

师：在这小小的围棋盘下可有不少数学问题呢！

板书课题：

让学生畅所欲言。吸引学生的注意力，激发学生的学习兴趣。

二、探究新知

（1）教师投影出示围棋盘。

师：在围棋盘上一个点可以放一个子。

（2）出示例3。

围棋盘的最外层每边能放19个棋子。最外层一共可以摆多少个棋子？

师：同学们算得都正确。还有其他的方法吗？

师：你发现了什么？

学生通过分析比较会发现：围棋盘最外层摆的棋子数等于最外层每两个棋子间的间隔数。

（1）学生读题，理解题意。

（2）动手在围棋盘上摆一摆，数一数，小组合作探究。

（3）学生汇报。

通过动手摆，认真的观察判断，分析比较，从中发现规律。培养学生的发散思维，动手能力。

三、反馈应用

（1）教材第121页做一做第1题。

教师投影出示情境画面，出示第1题。

（2）教材第121页“做一做”第2题。

①讨论：可以怎么摆放？

②最少需要多少盆花？

（3）教材第121页“做一做”第3题。学生读题，理解题意。

学生汇报。

学生在小组中合作完成，然后教师指名汇报，全班集体订正。

四、全课小结通过今天的学习活动，你有什么收获？

板书设计： 植树问题（二）

a.19×2+17×2=72（个）

（19+17）×2=72（个）

b.18×4=72（个）

c.17×4+4=72（个）

封闭图形：植树棵数=间隔数

植树问题课件 篇3

教学目标：

1.使孩子透过生活中的事例，初步体会解决植树问题的方法。

2.初步培养孩子从实际问题中探索规律，找出解决问题的有效方法的潜力。

3.让孩子感受数学在日常生活中的广泛应用，培养孩子的应用意识和解决问题的潜力。

教学重点：

用解决植树问题的方法解决实际问题。

教学难点：

栽树的棵数与间隔数之间的关系。

教具准备：多媒体课件。

设计理念：新课标指出：“有效的数学学习活动不能单纯地依靠模仿与记忆，动手实践、自主探索与合作交流是孩子学习数学的重要方式。”同时指出：“孩子是数学学习的主人，老师是数学学习的组织者、引导者与合作者。”结合新课标的要求，教学中力求发挥孩子的主体地位，让他们动脑、动手、合作探究，经历分析、思考、解决问题的全过程，体会植树问题这一重要的数学思想方法。

教学过程：

一、谈话导入：

师：同学们，你们喜欢植树吗？你植过树吗？（生答）植树能绿化环境，造福人类。在生活中，常常遇到在路的一边、间隔必须的距离植树，这就需要计算准备多少棵树苗。还有许多类似的问题：比如在公路两旁安装路灯、花坛摆花、站队中的方阵等等，在数学上，我们把这类问题统称为“植树问题”。

二、揭示学习目标：（媒体出示）

透过这节课的学习，我们要解决哪些问题呢？

1.能根据相关条件，求出需要多少棵树苗或计算两树间的距离。

2.能利用植树问题，灵活解决生活中类似的实际问题。

三、探究新知：

1.出示例1：同学们在全长100米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（两端要栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？（生读题）

师：你会计算吗？（让孩子回答）你算的对吗？请同学们自己动脑来验证一下。

学习提示：（媒体出示）

①假如路长只有10米，要栽几棵树？如果路长是20米，又要栽几棵树？请你画线段图来看看。

②透过上面的分析，你能找出什么规律？和同桌或小组内说说。

③此刻你能算出一共需要多少棵树苗吗？

④你还有别的想法吗，在小组内说说。

2.孩子自学探讨。（师巡视）

3.班内交流。孩子回答后，师媒体演示间隔数和间隔点数的关系。

总结规律：栽的棵数比间隔数多1。

完成例题。

四、变化巩固：

1.做一做：118页孩子独立完成。订正时说说怎样想的，重点让孩子明确先求出间隔数，即36棵树有35个间隔。

2.122页第2题。独立完成，同桌交流想法，可一生板演。

五、检测反馈：（独立完成）

1.在一条长400米的马路的一边，从头到尾每隔8米种一棵树。一共能够种多少棵树？

2.5路公共汽车行驶路线全长12千米，相邻两站的距离是1千米。一共有几个车站？

3.从王村到李村一共设有16根高压电线杆，相邻两根的距离平均是200米。王村到李村大约有多远？

孩子完成后师批阅订正，发现问题及时解决。

六、总结延伸：

这节课我们学习了植树问题，并能利用植树问题解决生活中类似的实际问题，解答时要重点分清栽树的棵数与间隔数间的关系，后面还有一些不同的状况，期望大家开动脑筋，灵活处理。

植树问题课件 篇4

教学目标：

（1）在观察、操作及交流活动中抽象出植树问题的模型，掌握种树棵树与间隔数间的关系。

（2）体验复杂问题简单化的快乐。

教学重点：应用植树问题的模型解决相关的实际问题。

教学难点：理解棵树与间隔数之间的关系。

教学准备：课件

教学过程：（如下文）。

一、课前谈话

1.手指游戏

师：双手创造了幸福的生活，在我们的手上也隐藏了数学奥秘，同学们想明白吗？请举起右手像老师这样做，五指伸直，并拢再张开。看着张开的手，你从中想到了什么数字？（5，5个手指）

师：老师从中也得到了一个数字4，你们明白它指的是什么吗？（缝隙、空格等）

师：对了，指的是手指间的空格，在数学上我们把这样的空格叫做间隔。每两个手指之间有一个间隔，大家仔细观察老师的手，5个手指，有几个间隔，4个手指时有几个间隔呢？3个，2个手指时呢？

师：你们发现手指数与间隔数的关系了吗？谁能说一说？（间隔数+1=手指数）

[设计意图：以趣激学。从学生最熟悉的教学资源“手”入手，在简单的氛围中进入学习状态，初步感知生活中的植树问题。]

2.导入课题

师：我们手上都有这么多数学奥秘，看来数学真是无处不在！生活中的间隔到处可见。比如，刚才我们看到的5根手指有几个间隔；爬楼梯要几层；栓广告牌要几个柱子等就是数学中的植树问题。（板书课题：植树问题）这天咱们主要来研究“两端都栽”的规律。（板书：两端都栽）

二、动手种树，初步感知

1.创设情境，提出问题

（1）课件出示例1

同学们在全长100米的小路一侧植树，每隔5米栽一棵树（两端要栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

（2）理解题意

①指名读题，从中你了解哪些信息？

②理解“两端”是什么意思？

（3）讨论交流

师：我这样认为，100÷5=20，所以要准备20棵树苗。你们觉得呢？有了答案后与同桌交流交流。

全班讨论、交流，汇报后得出结论，这种说法不对。就应是：

100÷5=20（段）20+1=21（棵）（板书）

2.简单验证，发现规律

师：把双手举起来叉开手指，能够看到10根手指共有9个间隔，如果把手指看成树苗，10棵树有9个间隔。

课件演示：每5米一棵，种到第100米的时候，你发现了什么？（两端都要种）

问：100÷5=20（段）20表示什么意思？（两棵树之间的距离）

20+1=21（棵）20段为什么不是20棵，而是21棵呢？

我们把这条小路平均分成20份，其中的每一份（或者说每一段，每一个空）就是一个间隔，在这道题中，间隔指什么？共有几个间隔呢？也就是说，如果两端都种，种的棵树=间隔数+1

透过这个例题，你明白了什么？（棵数与段数有关，求棵数得先求段数。即段数=总长÷间距）

师：你们真了不起，发现了植树问题中十分重要的规律，那就是：

间隔数（段数）=全长÷段长

植树的棵数=间隔数+1

全长=段长×段数

[设计意图：导之敢学。在决定、计算、验证探索中学习知识，发现知识，并透过讨论交流，发现植树问题的一个十分重要的规律。]

三、利用规律，解决问题

师：其实植树问题并不只是与植树有关，生活中还有许多现象和植树问题很相似，我们一齐来看一看下面几个问题。

①刘怡瑶从家到校园乘公共汽车行驶路线全长3千米，相邻两站的距离是1千米。一共有几个车站？

②张老师去某班教室，从一楼开始，每走一层有12个台阶，共走了36个台阶，你明白她去几楼的教室吗？

③广场上的大钟3时敲3下，8秒敲完。11时敲11下，需多长时间？

师：这些题是不是应用植树问题的规律解决的？看来，应用植树问题的规律，不仅仅能解决植树的问题，生活中很多类似的现象也能用植树问题的规律来解决。

[设计意图：乐中求学。把生活中类似植树问题的各种现象糅合在一齐，加深对植树问题模型的理解，提升学生思维的灵活性和深刻性。]

四、再次探究，构建模型

1.创设情境，激趣导入

师：咱县新开张的德克士为了进一步宣传，要在全长50米的店面前沿插彩旗，请按照每隔5米插一面的要求设计方案，并说明理由。

2.设计方案，动手操作

师：能够独立思考也可小组讨论再设计方案。把你们设计的方案想一想，画一画，摆一摆。择优录取哦！

（生动手摆学具，画线段图，动手算，师行间巡视，个别辅导，注意发现不同的算法）

3.反馈交流

师：谁来说一说自己设计的方案？把前沿分成几个间隔？（10个）插了几面旗？（11面，10面，9面）

师：为什么同样的长度，同样的要求，插的旗数却不一样呢？你们的方案有什么特点呢？谁来展示一下自己的设计方案。

生1：我设计分成10个间隔，插11面旗，两端都插旗（投影展示线段图同时师五指伸直手势表述）。

生2：我也分成10个间隔，插10面旗，一端不插旗。（投影展示算法师拇指弯曲其余伸直手势表述）

生3：我10个间隔插9面旗，两端不插旗。（投影展示学具摆法后师拇指和小指弯曲其余手指伸直表述）……

4.师小结

同一个要求，同学们却设计出了这么多不同的方案，真有创造力！看来你们都有成为设计师的资格。

五、精彩回放，画龙点睛

1.用手势表达植树问题的模型并考察同桌的掌握状况。

2.透过这节课的学习，你们有什么收获？

六、穿越时空，展望未来

有20棵树，若每行4棵，问怎样种植，才能使行数更多？

七、板书设计

植树问题：

两端都种：棵数=间隔数+1

100÷5=20（个）……（间隔数）

20+1=21（棵）……（棵数）

10-1=9（个）……（间隔数）

9+1=10（棵）……（棵数）

植树问题课件 篇5

教材分析

本册教材的数学广角主要是渗透有关植树问题的方法。它通过生活中常见实际问题，让学生发现规律，抽取出植树问题的数学模型，再用来解决简单的实际问题。本课时是本单元的第一课时，是探讨关于一条线段并且两端都要栽的情况。

这是学生第一次接触“植树问题”，是后继学习的准备，需要正确建立数学模型。

教学目标

1、发现“植树棵数”与“间隔数”的规律，建立“树的棵数=总长÷间距+1”的数学模型。

2、能利用数学模型解决简单的实际问题。

3、在解决问题的过程中发现规律，建立模型，应用模型，建立初步的解决植树问题的方法。

4、体会数学模型的生活意义与作用，体验到学习的喜悦。

学习重点：采取什么策略正确解决“一条线段并且两端都种”的植树问题。

学习难点：发现“植树棵数”与“间隔数”的规律，建立“树的棵数=总长÷间距+1”的数学模型。

预设过程

一、尝试解题发现问题

1、揭题：今天我们来研究植树方面的问题。(板)

2、课件呈现学习材料，请学生尝试。

3、反馈，形成争议：

1)100÷5=20

2)100÷5+1=21

4、提出研究问题：植树棵数正好等于间隔数，还是间隔数加1呢？(板)我们来研究。

二、研究规律

1、议：在晒场的一侧(8米)种小树，两端都种，可以怎么种？

2、生述师画，发现棵数比间隔数多1。

3、自己尝试画图，完成表格。

4、议：你发现什么？

5、：当在路的一侧种树时，如果两端都种，棵数=间隔数+1，也就是等于总长÷间距+1。(板)

6、分析尝试题的正确解法

三、练习

1、变式练习

2、扩展练习

1、完成1-1。

1)议：已知什么，求什么？(师在模型的相应地方画√)

2)尝试完成，并反馈。

2、完成1-2。

1)议：已知什么，求什么？(师在模型的相应地方画√)

2)议：怎么求总长？(板)

3)尝试完成，并反馈。

3、完成2。

1)议：已知什么，求什么？(师在模型的相应地方画√)

2)议：从间隔10米，能停41辆，能求出什么？求出总长后，怎么安排这51辆车？

3)尝试完成，并反馈。

四、

植树问题课件 篇6

教学内容

义务教育课程标准实验教科书（人教版）四年级下册数学广角。

教学目标

1.经历将实际问题抽象成数学模型的过程，掌握种树棵数与间隔数之间的关系。

2.会应用植树问题的模型解决一些相关的实际问题，培养学生的应用意识和解决实际问题的能力。

3.感悟构建数学模型是解决实际问题的重要方法之一。

教学重点

让学生发现植树的棵数和间隔数之间的关系，并用发现的规律解决实际问题。

教学过程

一、创设情景，提出问题

情境：同学们参加植树活动，要根据植树要求“动脑筋，领树苗”。

问题：有一条12米长的小路，一小组要在小路的一边植树，要求每隔2米栽一棵（两端都栽），该领多少棵树苗呢？ （大屏幕出示）

二、探索规律，建立模型

1．实践操作，得出结论

（1）初步感知，大胆猜想

你们认为一小组的同学该领多少棵树苗呢？

（2）动手操作，验证猜想

用画图法或摆一摆的方法“栽一栽”。

2．尝试不同的栽法，积累研究素材

师：刚才我们是每隔2米栽一棵树，发现出现了6个间隔，可以栽7棵树。你们还有不同的栽法吗？

（1） 激发兴趣谈栽法

（2） 自由选择试栽法

（3） 交流汇报作记录

3．观察分析，发现规律

师：现在请大家认真观察一下老师记录的这些数据，你会不会有所发现呢？先独立思考，再把你们思考的结果互相说一说。

（1）认真观察，独立思考

（2）小组交流，集思广益

（3）班级汇报，总结规律

三、运用规律，解决问题

1．运用规律，解答117页的例1。

同学们在全长100米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（两端要栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

2．运用规律，解答118页的“做一做”。

园林工人沿公路一侧植树，每隔6米种一棵，一共种了36棵。从第1棵到最后一棵的距离有多远？

3．运用规律，解答119页的“做一做”的第1题。

在一条全长2千米的街道两旁安装路灯（两端也要安装），每隔50米安一座。一共要安装多少座路灯？

小结：安装路灯问题也是一种植树问题。

植树问题课件 篇7

教学目标：

（一）利用信息技术平台,提供问题情境，让学生通过生活中的事例探索、掌握解决封闭图形中植树问题的方法。

（二）通过多媒体课件，渗透数形结合思想，引导学生在解决问题的分析、思考过程中，经历抽取出数学模型的过程。

（三）在解决问题中，培养学生的独立思考、合作探究的能力，体会数学在生活中的广泛应用

教学重点、难点：

教学重点：

让学生掌握解决封闭图形植树问题的思想方法。

教学难点：

探索发现封闭图形情况下棵树与间隔数之间的关系。

教学过程：

（一）创设情景，引入问题

1．问题一：（出示图片）正方形桂花树台一边也要摆花，量一下边长是9米，每一米摆一盆，请大家帮助算一算，要几盆花？

反馈：谁来告诉大家要摆多少盆花？

预设：生1：91+1=10盆；生2：91=9盆；生3：91-1=8盆

师：这里都有91这是什么意思？+1就是求出了什么？不加的就是求出了什么？-1求出了什么？

小结：同学们用以前学习的植树问题帮我解决了这个数学问题。

2．问题二：如果桂花树的正方形木台四周都要摆上10盆花，共要多少盆花？

［通过展示校园中鲜花盛开的美丽景色，创设情境，引出生活中的数学问题，激发学生探究欲望。］

生1：40盆，

生2：36盆，

师：到底是36盆还是40盆，要知道哪个答案是对的，怎么办？

（让学生互相争论）（听听学生的意见，如果学生说画最好，如果学生说其他，教师可以介入说：老师这儿有个建议。）

小结:看来有些同学认为用画一画的方法比较好是吧，那就请同学们用自己认为好的方法来验证到底是需要多少盆？

（二）多元表征，感知模型

1．出示学习建议：

（1）你可以自己最喜欢的方法来说明你的答案是怎么来的

（2）你也可以利用老师提供的材料（材料1），画一画，圈一圈。并写出算式。（花盆可以用符号表示）

（3）先独立思考，再在小组中说一说你的方法。

［把学习的主动权交给了学生，放手让学生想一想、画一画、说一说，激活学生已有的生活经验，既满足了学生的表现欲望，又培养了学生自主探索、小组合作学习的意识。］

2．反馈：你是怎么想的？（先把学生的四种方法都出来，再讲评每一种方法）

预设：

生1：102=20，82=16 20+16=36；

生2：94=36；

生3、84+4=36；

生4：104-4=36；

师：你能解释一下是怎么想的吗？（听完学生说自己的思路如果他没画图的，问一下用同样的算法，但是画图的）

［通过多媒体投影直观展示学生思维过程和解决方法，激发学生探究欲望。］

回顾:刚才我们这四种方法解决了问题.(课件演示)

［通过信息技术动态展示不同的解题策略，引导学生从不同之中找到相同点，将各种算法统一起来，散而不乱，达到了多样化之后的优化，让学生经历多元表征，充分感知数学模型，实现了信息技术与教学内容的整合。］

小结：通过同学们的认真思考，利用已有的知识与经验探索出了这四种不同的策略来解决了同一个数学问题。

（三）探索规律，有效建模

1．抛出问题：除了给桂花树正方形的台摆鲜花，在学校的其他的还有其他的一些地方也要摆一些鲜花，

每边6盆，一共要多少盆？ 每边4盆，一共要多少盆？

2．反馈：你是怎么算的？（结合图说明算式的意思）

预设：

生1：63=18 46=24

生2：63-3=15 46-6=18

生3：63+3=15 46+6=30

3．讨论:仔细观察这些算式，告诉我们这些封闭图形上每边摆花的盆数，求花盆总数可以怎么求呢？

小结：我们从正方形，三角形，六边形等等作为研究的材料，发现了在这样的封图形上植树的棵数就是（每边盆数-1）边数=盆数

4．

展开：圆坛一周全长16米，如果沿着圆坛一圈每隔2米放一盆花，一共需要几盆花？

学生自主探索。

交流评价：一共种几棵？你是怎么想的？你觉得在圆上放花有规律吗？有什么规律？（学生在电脑上进行多媒体演示并讲述想法）

你还有什么新的发现？（引导学生将在圆坛上摆花的问题和线段上的植树问题联系起来）

小结：花盆数=间隔数

［让学生在电脑上直观操作，充分展示学生的思维过程，在思维碰撞中学生们认识到在圆坛上摆花的问题可以和线段上的植树问题联系起来，轻松地找到了新旧知识的结合点。］

5．提升：在三角形、正方形、正六边形上摆花盆的总数与间隔数是不是也具有这样的关系呢？

（1）学生探索

（2）反馈

（3）演示:将这些图形拉伸为圆，并转化为线段。

小结：其实在所有封闭图形上，都具有花盆数=间隔数这样的关系。所以我们要求花盆总数，可以先求出间隔数。

［通过电脑动画的演示，学生可以直观地发现所有的封闭图形植树问题都可以转化为在圆上的植树问题，并且有和在线段上一端栽树的情况一样。这样，又一次沟通了各个封闭图形之间的联系，轻松突破的本课难点。］

（四）拓展提升，实践应用

1．学校为了美化校园环境，开展了摆花设计方案征集。有以下三种，请选择一种你最喜欢的图形，算一算如果每边放三盆花，一共可以摆放多少盆花？你还能设计出其他方案吗？

2．小结

通过今天这节课的学习，你有什么收获？

植树问题课件 篇8

【教学目标】

1、知识与技能：通过合作探究，动手实践，让学生在做数学的过程中经历由现实问题到构建数学模型的过程，理解并掌握植树棵数与间隔数之间的关系。

2、过程与方法：通过学生自主实验、探究、交流、发现规律，培养学生动手操作、初步探究、合作交流的能力，并培养学生针对不同问题的特点灵活解决问题的能力。

3、情感态度价值观：让学生在探索、构建模型、用模型的过程中体验到学习成功的喜悦和认识归纳规律对后续学习的重要性，培养学生探索归纳规律的意识，体会解决植树问题的思想方法。

【教学重难点】

引导学生在观察、操作和交流中探索并发现间隔数与棵数的规律。并能运用规律解决实际的问题。

【教学准备】课件，纸条。

【教学过程】

一、谈话引入，明确课题

在我国的北方经常出现沙尘暴天气，它给我们的生活带来了很大的危害，今天老师也给大家带来了几张有关沙尘天气的图片新闻。（课件出示沙尘暴的图片）同学们知道吗？实际呀沙尘天气是大自然对人类的惩罚，正因为以前人们的乱砍乱伐，破坏了大自然的生态环境，才会出现今天的沙尘天气。最近呀咱们这个城市也经常出现雾霾天气，雾霾比沙尘暴天气危害更大，那雾霾给我们的生活带来了什么不便呀？那你们知道治理沙尘和雾霾天气最好的办法是什么？（植树造林）。那么今天这节课我们就来研究植树中的数学问题。（板书课题）

二、探索交流，解决问题

（一）设计植树方案

为了改善我们的校园环境，让大家呼吸到更新鲜的空气，学校准备在全长20米的小路一边植树，请按照每隔5米栽一棵的要求设计一份植树方案。（你能设计出几种方案）

你们认为应该怎么种树?只让学生口答方案，追问有哪三种方案？（两端种树、一端种树、两端不种）。

（二）、两端都种

出示方案一：学校在一条长20米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（两端要栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

（1）学生齐读题，理解题意：强调“一边”和“两端”，理解每隔5米栽一棵的意思。

（2）理解示意图展示。

那我们就一起来试着种一下吧！用一条线段来表示20米长的小路的一边，我们应该怎么种呢？开头为什么要种？（因为是两端植树）也就是说路的开头先要种一棵，那下棵怎么种呢？要和头一棵树隔5米，也说是隔5米种一棵，一直种到小路的末端。

（3）理解株距。

看示例图，大家发现没有每两棵树之间的距离相等吗？都是多少？（5米）这里的5米就表示株距，株距指的就是每两棵树间的距离。实际上株距表示的就是一个间隔的长度。

（4）发现规律

谁能说说棵数和间隔数之间是什么关系？

板书：两端都栽：棵数=间隔数+1

间隔数棵数-1

（5）教学画线段图

这个公式短时间记住没问题，但时间长了，三个月、半年、一年忘了怎么办？可以借助画线图，带着学生在黑板上画线段图。

（6）引导学生列式：

20÷5＝4（个）（这里的4指什么？）

4+1＝5（棵）（这个算式求的是什么？为什么要加1？）

答：一共需要5棵树苗

（三）、两端都不种

出示方案二：学校在一条长20米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（两端都不栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

（1）指生读题后，说说这道题和上一题的不同点。

（2）两端都不栽什么意思？指生比划一下，出示示例图让学生判断画的对吗？

（3）发现规律并板书。

（4）同桌之间互相列算式。

（5）指生交流并点评。

（四）、一端种树

出示方案三：学校在一条长20米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（只栽一端）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

（1）生齐读题后，说说这道题和上一题的不同点。

（2）只栽一端什么意思？

（3）指生交流，发现规律并板书。

小结：通过这三种植树情况，大家发现没有要想算出棵数，必须知道什么？（只要知道间隔数，就可以算出棵数。）引导学生说出：间隔数＝总长÷株距。

你们真是学校的智多星，不仅帮学校解决了难题，还探究出了植树的规律，真是太棒了！你们幸福吗？拍拍手吧！

（五）强化规律

课件出示种树的三种情况，学生抢答，记忆种树的规律。

其实啊，植树问题也不只是与植树有关，生活中还有很多的现象与植树问题类似，你能举出一些类似的例子吗？（指名说一说，如，路灯，栏杆，队形……）数学上我们把这些现象统称为植树树问题，我们一起来看一下生活中的植树现象。（课件展示图片。）

三、回归生活，实际应用。

我们都知道数学离不开生活，要解决生活中的植树问题，我们首先要确定它是三种情况中的哪一种。老师收集了一些生活实例，同学们能不能运用我们刚探究的这些规律来解决这些问题呢？对自己有没有信心？那就让我们一起走进数学，走进生活吧！（课件逐一出示练习）

1、为迎接六一儿童节，学校准备在教学楼前60米的道路一旁摆放鲜花（靠墙一端不放），相邻两盆花之间的距离3米。一共需要几盆花？ 属于（ ）

①两端摆 ②一端摆 ③两端不摆

答：一共需要（ ）盆花。

2、小学生广播操队列中，其中一列纵队26米，相邻两个学生之间的距离是2米。这列纵队一共有几个学生？

属于（ ）

①两端都站 ②一端站 ③两端不站

答：这列纵队共有（ ）个学生。

3、一根木头长8米，每2米锯一段。一共要锯几次？属于（ ）植树现象？

①两端种 ②一端种 ③两端不种

答：一共要锯（ ）次。

4、动物园的大象馆和猩猩馆相距60米,绿化队要在两馆间的小路两旁栽树,相邻两棵树之间的距离是3米,一共要栽几棵树?

（1）先判断属于哪种情况，独立解决。

（2）小组交流。

（3）汇报。

四、回顾整理，反思提升。

学习永远是件快乐而有趣的事情，这节课老师感到很快乐，我收获了幸福，你们收获了什么？

【板书设计】 植树问题

两端都栽： 两端都不栽： 只栽一端：

棵数＝间隔数﹢1 棵数＝间隔数－1 棵数=间隔数

间隔数=棵数-1 间隔数=棵数+1

植树问题课件 篇9

教学内容：

《义务教育教科书.数学》五年级上册p106—107。

教材分析：

“植树问题”是义务教育课程标准实验教科书四年级下册“数学广角”的内容，教材将植树问题分为几个层次：两端都栽、两端不栽以及封闭图形（方阵问题）等。其侧重点是：在解决植树问题的过程中，向学生渗透一种在数学学习上、研究问题上都很重要的数学思想方法——化归思想，通过现实生活中一些常见的实际问题，让学生从中发现一些规律，抽取出其中的数学模型，然后再用发现的规律解决生活中的一些简单实际问题，同时使学生感悟到应用数学模型解题所带来的便利。本课的教学，并非只是让学生会熟练解决与植树问题相类似的实际问题，而是把解决植树问题作为渗透数学思想方法的一个学习支点。借助内容的教学让学生从中发现一些规律，抽取出其中的数学模型，然后再用发现的规律来解决生活中的一些简单实际问题。

学情分析：

学生已经学习了除法的含义、《表内除法》、《除数是一位数的除法》、《除数是两位数的除法》以及用线段图来解决问题的方法。从学生的思维特点看，四年级学生仍以形象思维为主，但抽象思维能力也有了初步的发展，具备了一定的分析综合、抽象概括、归类梳理的数学活动经验。这部分内容放在这个学段，说明这个内容本身具有很高的数学思维和很强的探究空间，既需要教师的有效引领，也需要学生的自主探究。

设计理念及思路：

“数学广角”系统而有步骤地向学生渗透数学思想方法，尝试把重要的数学思想方法通过学生可以理解的简单形式，采用生动有趣的事例呈现出来。

解决植树问题的思想方法是实际生活中应用比较广泛的数学思想方法。植树问题通常是指沿着一定的路线植树，这条路线的总长度被平均分成若干段（间隔），由于路线不同、植树要求的不同，路线被分成的段数（间隔数）和植树的棵数之间的关系就不同。“植树问题”的本质是对应问题，只要明确了“间隔”与“树”这两者之间的对应关系，突出“一一对应”的思想，再以此为基础并通过适当变化就可以应对各种变化了的情况。

为了更好的落实教学目标，本节课在教材的.处理上我作了如下调整，把原例题中的路长“100米”改为“20米”，把“两端要栽”这个条件去掉了。数据改小有利于学生思考，也便于学生动手操作，但并不影响我们要研究的数学问题。“两端要栽”这个条件去掉了，旨在让学生在一个开放的情境中，通过动手操作、演示用一一对应的思想方法去探究植树问题中间隔数与棵数的关系。再通过展示现实生活中一些常见的实际问题，让学生从中发现一些规律，抽取出其中的数学模型，然后用发现的规律尝试用数学的方法来解决实际生活中的简单问题，从而使学生建立起深刻、整体的表象，提炼出植树问题解题思想方法。

教学目标：

1.知识技能。

借助直观，通过间隔和数的对应，理解间隔数与植树棵数的规律，建立不同情境下植树问题的数学模型。

2.数学思考。

（1）学生在参与观察、动手操作、比较等数学活动中，发展解决问题的意识和能力，能清晰地表达自己的想法。

（2）学会独立思考，体会数形结合、一一对应、化归、建模等数学思想方法。

3.问题解决。

（1）能运用所得到的规律解决实际问题。

（2）能和他人合作交流。

4.情感态度。

（1）能积极参与数学活动，对数学有好奇心和求知欲。

（2）在数学学习过程中，体验获得成功的乐趣，建立自信心。

（3）感受数学在日常生活中的广泛应用，体验植树问题的价值和作用。

教学重、难点

重点：探究棵数与间隔数之间的关系，运用一一对应，建立植树问题模型，会应用植树问题的模型解决一些相关的实际问题。

难点：应用植树问题的模型灵活解决一些相关的实际问题。

教学准备

多媒体 笔 直尺

教学方法

讲授、演示、讨论交流、操作练习等

教学过程：

一、课前互动、引出课题

师：想让自己的头脑变得更聪明的同学请以最佳的状态坐好，都有这个美好的愿望，光说不练可不行。这节课就让我们走上思维的道路，一起去迎接新的挑战吧。请看老师给你们带来的课前思维训练题：

1.一根木头长10米，要把它平均锯成9段，需要锯几次？

2.四年级在三楼，每上一层要走20个台阶，一共要走多少个台阶才能到三楼？（每层台阶数相同）

师：锯木头和上楼梯是生活中常见的现象，我们把它叫做“植树问题”，今天这节课我们就一起来研究有关植树问题的知识。（板书课题：植树问题）

二、探索规律、建立模型

（一）创设情境，出示问题。

园林工人打算在一条长20米的笔直小路一边植树，请同学们按照每隔5米栽一棵的要求帮忙设计一份植树方案，并说明理由。

师：从这份要求上，你能获得哪些信息？

（预设：20米长的小路，一边，每隔5米栽一棵）

师：每隔5米是什么意思？

（预设：两棵树之间的距离是5米，每两棵树的距离都相等）

（二）动手操作，设计方案

同桌二人合作，摆一摆或画一画

（三）交流汇报，展示作品

师：大多数同学已经完成了，谁来汇报（汇报后展示）

（预设：我们小组设计栽了5棵树。在一条长20米的路上，开始先栽一棵，然后隔5米栽第二棵，再隔5米栽第三棵……再隔5米栽第五棵。）

师：不错，老师期待你更精彩的表现，他们设计了5棵，还有不同方案吗？

（预设：我们小组设计栽了4棵树，开头的地方没栽，先隔5米栽第一棵……隔5米栽第4棵。）

师：为什么开头的地方不栽？

（预设：因为有的时候在一条路的一头可能会有障碍物，所以不能栽。）

师：你想得真周到，真是个既细心又爱动脑的孩子。是呀，如果在路的一端有建筑物就只能在另一端栽了！同学们的设计真精彩啊！还有不同的设计方案吗？

（预设：如果路的两端都有建筑物，可以栽3棵。）

师：你回答的太棒了，老师感到震撼！对，有的时候在路的两端都会有障碍物，这个时候路的两端就不能栽树。

（四）比较方案，探究规律。

1.间隔数与总长、间距的关系。

（1）出示植树的三种情况，学生观察相同点。

师：同学们真有创造力！短时间内根据要求设计出了三种不同的方案，你们都有资格成为一名设计师了。现在请用你们雪亮的眼睛看一看，这三种方案中相同的地方是什么？

（2）学生汇报，教师板书。（总长、间距、间隔数 20 5 4）

（3）间隔数与总长、间距的关系。

师：这三种方案的间隔数都是几？能用一个算式来表示吗？（20÷5=4（个））在这个算式中，每个数字分别表示什么？

你们能说说怎样求间隔数吗？（总长÷间距=间隔数）

问：要想知道有几个间隔，必须要知道哪两条信息？（总长、间距）

师：接下来，咱们来比一比，谁的反应快？（如果一条小路长100米，每隔10米栽一棵树，一共有多少个间隔呢？如果每隔20米栽一棵树，一共有多少个间隔呢？）

2.间隔数与植树棵数之间的关系。

（1）学生观察不同点，教师讲解三种方法的名称，同桌交流棵树和间隔数的关系。

问：刚才咱们找到了这三种方案的相同点，请同学们再用你们睿利的目光观察，不同的地方又是什么呢？ (预设：植树的棵数不同、植树的方法不同)

学生汇报后，教师讲解三种方法的名称。

师：看来虽然间隔数相同，但是不同的植树方法，植树棵数是不同的。我们就来研究在不同的植树方法中，间隔数与植树棵数之间存在着怎样的关系。赶紧用你们的慧眼去发现吧，可以把你的发现和同桌分享。

（2）汇报交流。（板书）

（3）演示，明白原因。（演示：树与间隔之间的一一对应关系。）

3.小结：解决植树问题方法

师：会求植树的棵树吗？这三种关系可是个宝贝，你们想得到它吗？那请闭上眼睛，打开你的大脑主机，我要把这个宝贝输入你的大脑了，千万别开小差啊，出现死机现象那可麻烦啦，准备好了吗？我要开始传宝贝了……好，收到了宝贝的同学请用最美的姿势坐好。

三、巩固应用、内化提高

师：既然宝贝已经保存在你的大脑里了，那可不能让它天天睡懒觉，得常常拿出来发挥一下它的神奇作用。下面这几道题就需要它大显身手。请看：

1.有一条500米的石子路，在石子路的一侧每隔5米栽一棵（只栽一端），需要准备几棵树？

2.同学们在全长1000米的小路一边植树，每隔8米栽一棵（两端都栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

3.大象馆和猩猩馆相距60米。绿化队要在两馆间的小路一侧栽树，相邻两棵树之间的距离是3米。一共要栽几棵树？

4.在一条全长180米的街道两旁安装路灯，（两端都要安装），每隔6米安一座。一共要安装多少座路灯？

四、课堂总结、拓展延伸

师：今天我们一起研究了有关“植树的问题”，不过，我有一个疑问想请大家帮我解释一下：植树问题就仅仅是指植树这一种现象吗？

生举生活中的其他例子，锯木头、上楼梯、安装路灯……

回到大脑思维体操的题目，进一步理解每一个算式表示的意思。

师：第一题锯木头属于哪种情况，第二题又属于哪一种情况呢？

师：今天这节课，你觉得你最大的收获是什么？

师：植树问题在我们的生活中无处不在，它美化着我们的生活，美化着我们的校园。其实在“植树问题”中，“植树”的路线可以是一条线段，也可以是一个封闭图形，比如正方形、长方形或圆形等。有兴趣继续探索吗？请利用本节课学到的方法回家和家长探讨。

板书设计：

（一条线段上的）植树问题

方法 间隔数 棵数 关系

总长 ÷ 间距

两端都栽 4 5 棵数=间隔数+1

只栽一端 4 4 棵数=间隔数

两端不栽 4 3 棵数=间隔数-1

YJS21.cOm更多幼师资料小编推荐

树木学课件(收藏12篇)

以下是小编为您整理的“树木学课件”相关内容，希望能对您有所帮助，请立即来尝试这篇文章的味道。每位老师在上课前都会准备自己的教案课件，因此每天老师都会按时按质地编写出优秀的教案课件。教案课件的设计非常全面，对于教学的深化和提高教学水平非常有帮助。

树木学课件(篇1)

活动目标

1、认识常见的花草树木，知道他们的基本特征。

2、初步了解身边的花草树木的生活习性，知道通过查资料等方式了解更多的植物。

3、初步了解花草树木的本领，能够做个悉心的观察者，感受植物对人们生活的积极作用。

4、引导学生珍爱生命，热爱自然，从小树立起爱绿、护绿的意念。

活动重点：

让学生了解花草树木的基本特征和作用，引导学生珍爱生命、热爱自然，从小树立起爱绿、护绿的意念。

活动准备

一张学生问卷调查表。

1、以小组为单位，事先确定要介绍的植物，收集实物或照片，配上文字说明，并了解该种植物的生活习性、特征和功用。

2、故事题材。

3、图片、课件以及做头饰的纸、剪刀、水彩笔等。

4、教室内摆放一些花木盆景。

活动过程

活动一：绿色小调查

课前先让每个学生完成一张问卷调查表，内容为

如果你碰到下列情形，会怎么做？

（1）我家周围的小树上晒满了衣服和被子，你看到了会怎么做？

A不管它B让自己的父母家人别去晒C劝阻晒衣服的主人

（2）当你看到广场上飘香的樱花时，你的做法：

A偶尔摘一些B欣赏它C经常去摘

（3）对于公园里写着花草树木名称的牌子，你的做法：

A当作没看见B不认识的植物去看看

（4）你经常通过看书、看报、上网了解环保形势吗？

A偶尔了解B经常了解C从不了解

（5）你种过花草树木吗？

A有B没有

（6）你为班级捐过花草吗?

A有B没有

这张调查表让学生在课前完成，教师统计结果，以方便上课时用。结果：能自觉保护花草树木的学生占*%，基本能做到爱护花草树木的学生占*%，对爱护花草树木的意识不强的学生占*%。有了这份课前调查，上课时就可以得心应手。

活动二：绿色小使者

1、情景引入，激发兴趣

点击课件，播放今年植树节那天全民植树的场景，内容可以选择公园、校园、马路两旁等不同的地点。

提问：这是哪一天？这一天是什么节日？

大家为什么要在这一天植树呢？看了图片以后，你有什么话想说？

2、汇报课前的调查结果

请把各自带来的有关花草树木的实物或图片在小组内展示。

学生在小组内展示讨论，教师巡视。

3、相互合作，制作头饰。

每个小朋友拿出剪刀、胶水、彩纸、硬纸版、水彩笔等选用自己喜欢的花草树木制作头饰。（教师巡视指导）

4、各组整理课前收集到的植物的生活习性、功用等，明确分工，并带上头饰准备活动。

5、我是绿色小使者表演赛

各组上台表演，可以一个个介绍我是什么花草或什么树木，另外几个介绍功用。

每组表演结束后，在黑板上的展示台光荣榜上粘贴每种植物的图形以及该植物的作用。（文字介绍）

（这张光荣榜可以长期展示在教室里，以便让每个学生记住各种植物的名称及作用）

活动三：绿色好朋友

1、看课件，想想花草树木对人类还有什么好处？

课件上的图片为：

（1）街道两旁绿树成荫，夏天可以乘凉，冬天可以避沙，还能使空气清新。

（2）河堤两旁树木茂密，狂风暴雨来临也不能摧毁

（3）花草树木能使空气清新，还能点缀校园

(4)花草树木能够改善气候等

2、课件展示：花草树木与人们衣、食、住、行的关系

衣：棉花是种出来的，它可以做衣服，棉织品特别环保，爸爸、妈妈都喜欢

给小朋友买全棉的衣服，我们盖的被子等都与植物有关系。桑树的叶子可以喂蚕，蚕丝是很宝贵的

食：水果、粮食都是我们人类的必需品，人人离不开它。

住：房子的建造、家具的打造需要树木，室内的环保需要花木，如：装修后的有毒气体可以用芦荟来吸收，有些花草可以使室内空气清新，还能美花环境。

行：现在使用的乙醇汽油，乙醇是用粮食发酵提取的。

通过以上事例介绍，使学生真正感到花草树木与人类是密不可分的。

看了这些图片，你想说什么？

活动四:护绿很重要

1、创设情景，教师讲故事：（内容主要是树木被砍伐、花草被摧残方面的。）

植物对人类的作用真大啊，可是我们生活中还是有破坏绿化的现象，老师在课前进行了一次问卷调查，发现大多数小朋友在平时的生活中有较强的环保意识，但也有少数同学在这方面意识淡薄。通过今天的学习，老师相信你们在以后的生活中，会更好地保护花草树木，爱护自己的家园。环境是我们赖以生存的必要条件，为了使我们的家园更美好，请大家从我做起，从身边的小事做起。

活动五：护绿大行动

1、我们知道花草树木是我们的好朋友，那么我们能为花草树木做些什么呢？

2、

我们可以用简笔画的形式画一到两种植物，并用一两句话介绍一下这种植物的用处，或写一、两句爱护植物的宣传语。以小组为单位制订一个护绿行动计划，可以在校园里认领一棵小树或一盆花。

3、各小组还应该进行护绿记录。

树木学课件(篇2)

活动名称：语言活动

活动内容：树木的`本领

活动目标：

1、知道树木有平衡生态、净化空气、阻隔噪音的作用

2、学会欣赏花、草、树木，懂得爱护花草树木。并用语言表达出来

活动准备：猴子、小熊、牛、小鹿、小狗、大象、刺猬、小兔布偶

活动过程：

一、引入

1、观察图片 讨论小鸟的家在哪里？

2、提问：小鸟喜欢住在哪里？

3、欣赏儿歌《小鸟的家》

二、听故事提问《猴博士的话真灵》

1、小熊家住的地方怎么了？

2、种树以后，发生什么变化？

3、老牛和小鹿又发生了什么事情？

4、猴博士对他们说了什么？

5、小狗又怎样了？

6、幼儿复述故事总结出树木可以隔音、净化空气

7、讨论 种树还有什么好处？（教师记录）

8、小树是我们的好朋友，我们应该怎样对待他们？

三、总结

树木学课件(篇3)

优秀教案名称：春天的树木为什么会绿？（幼儿园安全教案）

优秀教案目标：

1、知道树落叶和枯黄的原因；

2、培养幼儿比较、观察、概括的能力。

优秀教案准备：

1、有关常绿和落叶树的课件；

2、常绿树、落叶树的树干各一棵；

3、让幼儿搜集各种树叶。

优秀教案难点：提高幼儿观察、概括的能力。

活动重点：知道树常绿和落叶的原因。

活动过程：

一、观看录像，激发幼儿兴趣

师：我们来看一个短片，看片中有什么？(幼儿看录像)

提问：你们看到了什么?(许多大树,许多黄黄的叶子,有的落到地上,还在空中飞舞)

师：片中这些树上的叶子为什么是黄颜色的？为什么都落到地上了呢？(有的小朋友说是叶子老了，还有的说是天冷了)

师：我们再来看一个短片(幼儿看录像)

提问：你们又看到了什么？(皑皑白雪,绿绿的松树)

师：下雪了，天这么冷，为什么这些叶子没有枯黄飘落呢？(短片中的景象，使幼儿形成了两个明显的概念：一个是落叶，一个是常绿)

二、探索感知

师：老师给小朋友准备了许多树叶，请你们打开看一看吧。（引导幼儿给树叶分类）

提问：你手中的树叶有几种也颜色？（黄色和绿色）

师：请小朋友比一比两种颜色的叶子谁的面积大谁的面积小呢？幼儿操作得出（黄叶子面积大，绿叶子面积小）

师：请小朋友摸一摸两种颜色的叶子，说说自己的感觉。幼儿通过触摸得出：黄叶子薄薄的、软软的、表面粗造。绿叶子厚厚的、很坚硬、表面光滑。

三、总结点题

请幼儿观看短片，再现树叶飘落的景象，并告诉幼儿：像这些秋天到来树叶飘落的大树有一个共同的名字叫落叶树。像松树、柏树这些树叶常年绿绿的大树也有一个共同的名字叫常绿树。

四、师幼互动、做《树叶找家》游戏

1、教师出示一棵落叶树的树干，模仿落叶树妈妈的口吻说：“我是一位树妈妈，我的树叶宝宝又大又薄，表面没有蜡质，秋天到来时空气干燥，只能喝到很少的水。树叶宝宝慢慢枯黄，北风一吹就剩下光秃秃的树枝了。小朋友你能帮我找到树叶宝宝吗？音乐响起，幼儿把落叶树的树叶放在落叶树上。

2、老师出示一棵常绿树的树干，模仿常绿树妈妈的口吻说：“我也是一位树妈妈，我的树叶宝宝像针一样尖细，上面有一层蜡一样的东西，保护着树叶中的水分。宝宝不怕太阳晒，也不怕被风吹。一年四季都是绿油油的。小朋友你能帮我找到树叶宝宝吗？音乐再次响起，幼儿把的常绿树的叶子放在常绿树上。

活动延伸

让幼儿做着树叶飘落的动作走出活动室，去寻找院子里的常绿树和落叶树。

春天内一棵开花的树

活动目的：

1．发展幼儿的口语表达能力。

2．让幼儿知道花儿好看我不摘的道理。

3．培养幼儿良好的行为习惯意识。

活动准备：大树一棵，树上开满鲜花。注：鲜花是活动的，可以任意摘下或贴上，鲜花若干。

活动过程：

1.教师以快乐的口吻向幼儿介绍开满鲜花的大树引导幼儿体会到：开满鲜花的大树真美丽。（请幼儿告诉老师：开满鲜花的大树美丽吗？漂亮吗？）

2.教师用沉重的口吻向幼儿讲述：“有一天，大树前来了一个小男孩，看见这么美丽的花就摘了一朵，”教师边计边从树上摘下一朵花，“又有一天，一个小女孩来到大树下，见到了树上的花，也摘了一朵”教师又从树上摘下一朵花。“这一天，大树前来了一群小朋友，一见树上开满了鲜花都去摘，他们你一朵、我一朵不一会，树上的花就补摘没了”教师边讲这一朵一朵地把树上的花摘下来。“花没了，光秃秃的树真难看。大树伤心的哭了”教师把大树的脸变成哭样）

3.提问：启发幼儿回答：大树为什么哭了？（因为花没了）；就象没了衣服一样。你们说摘花的行为对吗？你们家的周围有什么花？（幼儿自由回答）；如果花园里没有鲜花我们的环境还美丽吗？

4.小朋友，你们都说得真棒，现在我们一起来打扮大树，让它笑起来好吗？（教师交待粘贴的方法，让幼儿把鲜花贴到大树上）

5.完成后，教师用欢快的口吻说：“花朵回来了，大树变美丽了，你们看大树笑得多开心。（教师又把大树的脸变成笑脸）

6.教师引导幼儿明白花儿好看我不摘的道理（你们以后看见美丽的花不能怎样）

7.你们说让大树来装饰我们的教室呢？还是带到室外装饰幼儿园的花园。

树木学课件(篇4)

【活动目标】

1、理解故事内容，知道爱护树木的方法。

2、萌发爱护树木，保护环境的情感。

【活动准备】

图片：小羊，小牛，小猴子，娃娃，小鸟，小树。

【活动过程】

一、导入：出示小树的图片。

你们在黑板上看到了什么呀?恩，一颗小树孤零零的长在这儿，我们来帮它找几个好朋友吧。你们猜猜看会有谁来找小树做朋友。今天呢老师带来了一个故事，来和你们说说小树找朋友的事儿。我们一起来听听看。故事的名字叫

冬天，小树光秃秃的，它想找些朋友。

小羊来了。它在小树的身上擦来擦去，叫小树给它搔痒痒。这样的朋友，小树不喜欢。

小牛来了，它用角顶着小树，叫小树和它斗架。这样的朋友，小树不喜欢。

小猴来了，它爬上爬下，抓着树枝荡秋千，翻杠杠。这样的朋友，小树不喜欢。

娃娃来了，叫小树拉着橡皮筋，跳呀、唱呀。这样的朋友，小树不喜欢。

这时，飞来一群小鸟，它们轻轻地落在树枝上，远远望去，就像一片片树叶，叽喳，叽喳，小鸟唱起歌来，“我们是小树的朋友!我们是小树的朋友!”

小树很高兴，高兴得枝条儿一摆一摆。小鸟飞走了，小树还舍不得呢，它挥着手儿：“再见，再见!”

大家听了，很不好意思。

小羊不着小树搔痒了，小牛不找小树斗架了，小猴不爬小树了，娃娃呢，找来一些稻草，给小树穿上冬装……

小树真快乐，它有很多很多的朋友啦!

树木学课件(篇5)

活动目标：

1、了解植物怎样过冬，感知冬季植物与气候变化的关系。

2、通过观察、绘画、交流等方式，进一步感知感知各种植物在冬季的不同状态。

3、有探索植物奥秘的兴趣及爱护植物的情感。

4、发展动手观察力、操作能力，掌握简单的实验记录方法。

5、培养探索自然的兴趣。

活动准备：

硬板纸上有一张白纸，彩色笔若干。

活动过程：

一、通过提问，引出话题。

1、师：小朋友，你知道现在是什么季节吗？气候有什么变化？

2、师：这么冷的天气，花草树木辉冬死吗？植物们准备好过冬天了吗？下面，我们带上纸板一起到户外，找一找、看一看、画一画冬天的植物。

二、引导幼儿到户外观察植物，并记录植物现象。

1、师：冬天到了，小树上的叶子有什么变化？大树上有什么变化？小草是什么样子的？

2、师：请小朋友在指定范围内自主观察，并讲述自己的发现和自己的疑问。

3、教师引导幼儿有重点地观察个别植物，帮助幼儿进一步感知植物的变化，①观察大树：请小朋友仔细观察冬天的树是什么样子？想一想，它们冻死了吗？找一找树上还留下了什么？（引导幼儿发现芽苞、果实、种子等。）②师：请小朋友剥开芽苞看一看，它里面有什么？猜一猜，明年春天会变成什么？

③观察小草：请小朋友在草地上观察，看看冬天的小草怎么样了？想一想，小草冻死了吗？挖出小草的根看看是什么颜色的？根上长着什么？

4、师：请小朋友仔细观察植物，并用自己的彩笔记录植物过冬的种种表现。

三、回活动室后组织交流。

师：请小朋友跟同伴讲讲你的记录和发现，看看植物过冬有几种方式？

四、帮助幼儿了解植物过冬的各种方式。

1、师：冬天到了，落叶树的叶子纷纷掉下来，常青树的叶子仍然还是绿色的；落叶对树木过冬有帮助吗？（减少水分蒸发、落叶能化为肥料、营养树根）

2、师：小草是什么颜色？它冬死了吗？（有的小草根已经死了，但是它留下了种子，有的小草根还活着，明年春天还会发芽。）

3、师：人们怎样帮助植物过冬呢？（在树上涂石灰、扎干草，为油菜、麦苗撒上草灰、干粪，把怕冷的观赏植物搬到室内或温室。）

活动反思：

这样在整个活动的过程中，孩子们非常开心。在老师与幼孩子们的互动、孩子与孩子的互动过程中，体现了让幼儿自主学习的新课程理念。本次活动的重难点是树木的过冬方式，由于这方面的内容知识性较强，相对来说比较枯燥，如果用说教的方式幼儿肯定难以理解。因此在讲解落叶过冬的方法时，我先通过孩子们的感知觉，让孩子们看一看，摸一摸，比一比，想一想。具体感知落叶树和常绿树的不同之处，让幼儿自己去发现，去讨论，从而得出结论;在讲解蜡质过冬时，让孩子们通过自己动手操作，仔细观察，找出结果。在这样自由探索的过程中，孩子才真正成为活动的主人。

在活动的延伸部分，孩子们从讨论人们怎样保护植物过冬到自己画一画，并动手为小树包裹稻草，形成了一个从量变到质变的过程。在自己动手实践的过程中，幼儿获得了极大的成功感和满足感，感到非常喜悦。

树木学课件(篇6)

［活动目标］

1、引导幼儿了解树木的品种有很多，并了解树木的多种用途，引导幼儿初步了解树对人、对环境的重要作用。知道树木是我们的好朋友。

2、了解保护树木的基本方法，激发幼儿爱护树木的情感、保护树木的意识。

3、引导幼儿合理想象，能大胆清楚地发表自己的见解，学习补充他人的发言。

［活动准备］

图片课件音乐磁带木制玩具

［活动过程］

1、出示各种木制玩具，鼓励幼儿自由探索玩法。并积极主动与伙伴分享自己的创新玩法。

师：今天老师给小朋友带来了许多礼物，请小朋友看一看是什么？你想怎么玩？

（1）个别幼儿展示自己的玩法。

（2）鼓励其他孩子创新玩法。谁能跟他玩的不一样？

（3)幼儿自由探索创新玩法。鼓励幼儿选一件自己喜欢的玩具，尝试用不同的方法玩。

（4）交换玩具，大家都来试一试不同的玩具有不同的玩法。

2、通过谈话引导幼儿了解树木的不同用处。

（1）师：刚才我们玩的这些玩具有一个共同的特点，你发现了吗？鼓励孩子大胆说出自己的观点--这些玩具都是用木头做成的。

（2）你知道树木除了能做玩具，还有什么用处吗？鼓励孩子大胆发言。（树木可以净化环境、吸收噪音、制作玩具、做家具、挡风遮阳、提供食物、防止沙尘暴）

3、发散思维：引导幼儿回忆自己平时见过的不同树木，能说出几种树木的名字。（放课件-各种树木的图片）

（1）师：在我们的幼儿园里、家里、马路上、公园里、小区里都种着很多不同的树，你知道这些树木的名字吗？（柳树、杨树、法桐树、槐树、合欢树、冬青、松树、银杏树、柏树、苹果树）

（2）这些树木的名字不一样，它们的用处一样吗？谁来说说看？

柳树、杨树、法桐、合欢树等大部分的树木都可以净化空气、美化环境、挡风遮阳、制作家具和玩具等，苹果树、梨树、柿子树等果树可以为人类提供水果

（3）教师小结：不同树木有不同用处

树木的种类很多，用处也很多，不同的树木有不同的用处，给我们的生活带来了很多方便和益处。

4、引导幼儿合理、大胆想象。并能用比较完整的语言表达自己的观点。

师：假如世界上没有了树木会怎么样？

小结：人类离不开树木，树木是我们的好朋友。假如没有树木，空气污染会更厉害；假如没有树木，我们就没有玩具；假如没有树木，沙尘暴让我们的环境变的很糟糕；假如没有树木，就会有泥石流把房子冲垮

5、与幼儿共同讨论保护树木的方法。

（1）师：树木有这么多的用处，我们人类离不开树木。那我们应该怎样保护树木呢？（不乱划乱刻、不掰树枝、冬天给大树穿上稻草袄）

（2）怎么样能让更多的人和我们一起保护树木呢？（宣传、做标志等）

［活动延伸］

出示树木生病的图片，鼓励幼儿想出给大树治病的方法。

树木学课件(篇7)

幼儿园中班艺术教案

活动目标

1、用红、黄、绿等相间的色彩，表现夏天树木的特点。

3、懂得在纸上吹出多彩树木的方法。

活动准备

1、彩笔、画纸、颜料等

2、夏天树林的景色图。

活动过程

1、图画欣赏

（1）出示图画，师生共同欣赏夏天美丽的树木风景图，并说一说，夏天的树林美在什么地方。

（2）出示范画，观察吹画制作的方法。

师：这幅画画的是什么？（树木）

它是什么颜色的？这幅画是怎样画出来的？（有绿色、黄色、粉色等）

2、指导画法

（1）树干

用黑色和灰颜料滴在纸的下方，然后用嘴慢慢向前吹，粗粗的树干就会出现。

（2）树枝

顺着树干生长的方向向前吹，从而吹出长短、粗细不同、各种各样的树枝。

（3）树叶

用手指蘸取绿色颜料在树枝上点画树叶，注意添花的位置、树叶的形状等

3、幼儿创作

引导幼儿选取合适颜色，掌握好方法，注意颜料的使用。

4、展示、欣赏作品。

小结及反思

夏天，是美丽的。幼儿通过绘画，可以感受大自然的美丽，增加了热爱自然的情感。

树木学课件(篇8)

认知目标：观察树木的生长姿态，了解树木的结构特征。

操作目标：运用剪、撕、贴、折等方法制作立体的树木。

情感目标：激发学生热爱大自然，保护树木的情感。

教学重点：了解树木的不同特征，学习制作方法。

教学难点：树枝的制作，树枝与树干的连接方法。

教学准备：cai课件、彩纸、剪刀、胶水、制作的树木作品等。

教学过程：

一、导入：感知与体验

1、请同学们闭上眼睛，欣赏一段音乐，问：“你们听到了什么？”（小鸟的叫声）

“同学们想象一下小鸟在什么地方鸣叫呢？”（树林里）

现在，让我们一起到树林里看一看。

2、课件欣赏美丽的树林：

你看到了哪些树木？高大挺拔的树干，郁郁葱葱的树叶，小鸟在林中欢叫，各种各样的小动物都在快乐地生活，多么和谐的画面！

植树节是哪一天？你知道树木有什么作用？

假如世界上没有了树木会怎么样？（环保教育）

洪水泛滥、沙尘暴、空气不新鲜了、世界缺少了绿色不美了……

树木是空气的清新器，它用绿色把地球家园打扮得非常美丽，我们不能乱砍伐树木，要爱护树木。

教师出示制作的树木，今天我们就来给小鸟建造一个美丽的树林家园。

板书课题：我爱树木

二、新授课：

1、树木主要由哪几部分组成的？

树干、树枝、树叶、树根。

2、你了解哪些有关树木的知识？

（1）生长在我国的。银杏、水杉、柏树等是地球上最古老的树种，它们和恐龙同时代。

（2）红杉树又叫“世界爷”，长得非常高，树干粗得和房子一样，树龄也很长。

（3）树干为什么都是圆的？

树干圆柱形是自身生长繁衍的需要，圆柱形具有的支撑力，也能防止外来伤害。树木的生长靠树皮来输送养料和水分。

（4）为什么种树要在秋天或春天？

冬天温度低，树木处于休眠期，需要养料少，到了春天，气温上升，解除休眠，树木开始生根发芽，进入一年中最为旺盛的生长阶段，春天种树，树木有利于长根成活。花木有两个生长期，夏天高温休眠后，秋天进入另一个生长期，秋天种树也易成活，但不如春季好。

3、树木的制作方法：（教师示范）

（1）想：制作什么树木？柳树、桃树、枫树、松树……

（2）制作树干：采用卷的方法做成圆柱，把树干底部剪开，粘贴在底版上。

（3）制作树枝：树枝可以卷成细小的圆柱，也可以直接剪成树枝形状。树干与树枝的连接可运用插接、粘贴等方法制作。

（4）制作树叶：做哪种树就做这种树的树叶，比如枫树、银杏树、柳树等，也可以任意想象，带有装饰趣味的树。

（5）添加环境：树木完成以后，可以添加树木周围的环境，如花草、篱笆、树上的小鸟的房子等。

4、欣赏学生做的优秀作品。

瞧，他们做的小树多漂亮，我相信同学们一定能做出更美的小树来。

三、布置作业：

运用剪、撕、贴、折等方法制作一棵漂亮的立体的树木，帮小鸟建造美丽的家。

四、学生作业，教师巡视辅导。（配乐）

五、展评作品：

老师把这些小树放在一起组成了一个茂密的树林，成为小鸟快乐的家园。

请同学们评议自己喜欢的树木作品，你觉得哪棵树制作得最有创意？教师从设计、制作、色彩等方面进行评价。

总结：爱护树木就是保护我们自己，多植树造林，我们的地球家园将会变得更加美丽！

树木学课件(篇9)

活动目标：

1、了解树木过冬的方式。

2、乐于关心日常生活中身边的食物。

活动准备：

树木过冬的图片

幼儿用书。

活动过程

一、谈话导入，激发幼儿活动的兴趣。

1、今天老师感觉很冷，你瞧！苏老师穿了这么多衣服呢？那老师为什么要穿这么多衣服啊？（冷），现在的天气这么冷，你们知道现在是什么季节吗？（冬天）

冬天的时候我们要穿好衣服，才不会觉得冷，如果不穿衣服就会感冒，那小朋友知道吗？冬天的时候，大树也要穿衣服呢？你们知道大树穿什么样的衣服吗？

请幼儿谈谈自己的已有经验。

2、每天早上来幼儿园的时候要经过马路，你发现马路上的树木有哪些变化吗？

幼儿根据自己的已有经验回答。

二、了解树木过冬也要御寒。

1、今天老师带来了很多的图片，我们一起来看看图上有什么？

出示图一：图上有什么？

大树怎么样了？为什么要给树木刷上白白的石灰水呢？（引导幼儿说出刷白白的石灰水是为了防虫，御寒。）

出示图二：这幅图上的大树怎么了？树干上有什么？（稻草绳）

为什么要给树木帮上稻草绳呢？

教师小结：原来这些都是人们给树木过冬的方法，为了更好地保护树木度过一个漫长的冬天。

2、你们在马路上，广场里，还看到树木是怎么样过冬的吗？

三、教师引导幼儿学习帮助植物或者其他物品过冬。

教师：天气转寒了，我们周围还有哪些植物以及其他物品需要我们帮助过冬的呢？

如：许多花，白天在户外，晚上要收回室内，暴露在外的自来水管要包扎好，一面冻裂，农民伯伯的蔬菜要用塑料薄膜搭棚等。

四、发放幼儿用书。

教师发放幼儿用书，引导幼儿和老师一起来观看书上的树木是怎么样过冬的，学会保护树木的情感。

教师引导孩子们回家或者在幼儿园寻找要保护的植物或者树木，与幼儿一起动手，帮助它们过冬。

活动延伸：

在来园和离园回家的路上观察马路上的树木有什么变化。

效果分析：

树木学课件(篇10)

活动目标

1、了解树有美化环境、调节气温、净化空气和防风、防沙、防洪等作用。

2、认识3月12日植树节，激发幼儿爱护树木的意识。

3、体验在不同环境下人们所产生的不同情感，知道环境影响人的身心健康。

活动准备

电子课本、幼儿用书、沙漠等等图片、自制节日牌一个。

活动过程

一、故事引入活动。

1、教师讲述《大森林的故事》。（故事内容见附页）

2、引导幼儿思考故事的启示。

——师：村子被风吹垮了吗？被沙埋了吗？被洪水淹没了吗？（没有）

——师：刚刚的故事告诉我们，树可以防风、防止水土流失，还可以防止土地沙化。

——师：请你们再想一想如果没有了树，还会怎样呢？

二、教师借助图片和多媒体，引导幼儿认识树的其他作用。

1、美化环境的作用。

——教师出示两幅不同的画面，请幼儿说一说喜欢哪一幅？为什么？（一幅有花草树木、一幅是沙漠）

——师：如果这两个环境不同的地方让你选择，你愿意住在哪儿？为什么？

——师：树木（花草）可以把周围环境打扮得非常美丽，使人们心情舒畅，这是树的其中一个作用。这种作用我们叫它“美化环境”。

2、净化空气的作用。

——教师选择两幅空气差别比较大的图片。（一幅绿树成荫，蔚蓝天空，人们的脸上有笑容；一幅有人在雾霾的天气里咳嗽，看不到任何的树）

——师：两幅图中的人为什么会有不同的表现？

——你愿意生活在这样的环境里吗？为什么？（幼儿讨论）。

——师：如果人们生活在这样的环境里，就会呛得咳嗽、恶心，时间长了，还会生好多疾病呢。

——师：后来，人们发现了一个秘密，树多的地方，空气特别新鲜，经过科学家研究发现，树木可以吸收有害气体和烟尘，排出氧气，使空气变得新鲜干净。于是，人们就在不同的地方种很多很多的树。

——师：这是树的另一个作用，这种作用叫“净化空气”。

3、调节气温的本领。

——师：天气炎热，我们户外活动时，你们喜欢在哪里玩？（树下面）

——请幼儿说一说在树下面玩和在太阳底下玩有什么不同？

——为什么有树的地方就会凉快呢？原来夏天天气炎热，树木里的水分大量蒸发，带走一部分热量，可以使温度降低，这种作用叫“调节气温”。

三、激发爱护树木的意识，认识植树节。

——师：树有很多作用，我们该怎样爱护树呢？鼓励幼儿大胆发言。

——师：树有很多作用，为了使我们生活的环境更美好，人们就共同选择了一个很重要的节日，来宣传努力保护我们的环境，并鼓励大家多种树、爱护树，这个节日叫“植树节”，就在每年3月12日这一天，以后有机会，希望小朋友能和家人多植树，保护我们的环境。

区角活动

语言区：投放幼儿用书，鼓励幼儿阅读，了解树的作用。

科学区：将树的作用的图片与“美好环境”“净化空气”“调节气温”等词配对。

美术区：鼓励幼儿画爱护树木、植树的情景。

家园互动

有条件的可以请家长带幼儿去种一棵树，并给幼儿讲解植树的意义，引导幼儿爱护树木，保护环境。

随机教育

户外活动时，教育幼儿不折树枝、不摘花，爱护绿色植物。

《大森林的故事》

很久以前，有一个美丽的村子，它的周围种了好多好多的树。

但是在离村子不远处，住着三个恶魔王，风魔王、雨魔王、沙魔王。

有一天，这三个恶魔王凑到一起要比试本领，风魔王说：“我的本领最大，我可以把村子吹得稀巴烂！”雨魔王说：“我的本领大，我拼命下雨形成洪水，把村子全淹没！”沙魔王说“你们的本领都不如我大，我可以把村子用沙全埋了！”

他们的话被过路的小喜鹊听到了，小喜鹊赶快把这个消息告诉了全村的人，人们听了非常害怕，，可是又没有办法，决定离开这个美丽的地方。

这时，忽然听到大森林里树叶“哗哗”作响，一个声音在喊着：“别害怕，我会保护你们的！”

风魔王来了，它鼓起腮帮子“呼呼”拼命地吹；雨魔王来了，倾盆大雨“哗哗”地下；沙魔王来了，狂风卷着黄沙“呜呜”地刮……可是不管三个魔王用多大的力气，这个美丽的村庄依然没有被破坏，因为它有大树的保护。

三个魔王很生气地走了，美丽的村子没有被风吹垮，没有被洪水淹没，也没有被沙子埋起来。

后来，人们为了感谢大树的保护，又种了很多很多的树，而且一直在种树。

树木学课件(篇11)

大班社会领域教案《树木的作用》

一、活动目标:

1、使幼儿知道树木在人类生活中的作用,懂得爱护树木。

2、教育幼儿爱护花草树木,促使其逐步养成环境保护的意识和良好的行为习惯。

3、发展幼儿的观察、分析、判断、思维及语言表达能力。

二、活动重点：了解和掌握树木对人类的作用。

三、活动难点：懂得在日常生活中逐步养成爱护树木良好行为习惯。

四、活动过程:

（一）引导幼儿表演歌曲《大树妈妈》，引导幼儿讨论：

刚才小朋友表演的大树妈妈真好，小朋友们知道大树妈妈给我们带来了什么作用吗？

以谈话的形式引出活动内容。

(二)教师出示表现环境的两幅图，请幼儿观察图片，认识树的作用。

1．美化环境的作用。

（1）这两幅图你喜欢哪一幅？为什么？（有花草树木……）

（2）如果这两个环境不同的地方让你选择，你愿住在哪儿？为什么？（环境美……）师：（指甲图）树木（花草）可以把周围环境打扮得非常美丽，是人们心情舒畅、愉快，这是树的一个作用。这种作用我们能用一句话说出它叫什么吗？（小朋友讨论、发言）小结：这种作用我们叫它"美化环境"（幼儿学记）。

2．净化空气的作用。

（1）这两幅图片里的工厂的上空有什么不同？（乙图冒着许多黑烟，甲图冒着淡灰色烟）

（2）（指乙图）如果你从冒黑烟的地方走，会有什么感觉？（呛嗓子、咳嗽）

(3）一阵风吹来，黑烟灰随风飘落，周围的环境会变成什么样子？你愿意生活在这样的环境里吗？为什么？（幼儿讨论）。

师：是啊，如果人们生活在这样的环境里，就会呛的咳嗽、恶心。时间长了，还会生好多疾病呢。

（4）小朋友再看，（指甲图）树多的地方，空中冒的烟为什么不黑呢？（幼儿讨论）师：原来，人们发现了一个秘密，树多的地方，空气特别新鲜，经过科学家研究发现，树木可以吸收有害气体和烟尘，排除氧气，使空气变得新鲜干净。于是，人们就在工厂的周围种了好多树。小朋友，这又是树的一个作用，你能说出这叫什么作用吗？（启发幼儿讨论）小结：树木能吸收有害气体和烟尘，排除氧气，能使空气变得新鲜干净，这种作用叫"净化空气"（幼儿学记）。

3．调节气候的本领。

（1）观察图上的人，在树下的人感觉会怎么样？（在树下的很凉快）没在树下的人感觉又会怎么样？（这边没有树，太热了）

（2）为什么有树的地方就会凉快呢？这又是树的一个作用呢？（幼儿讨论）

小结：原来夏天天气炎热，树木里的水分大量蒸发，带走一部分热量，它像空调一样可以使温度有高度变低，这种作用叫"调节气温"（幼儿学记）。

（三）防风、防沙、防洪的作用。

师：小朋友，现在老师给大家讲一个故事，听了故事后，你就会知道树还有一个更大的作用呢？

教师讲述《大森林的故事》：

聪明的小朋友，村子被风吹垮了吗？被洪水淹没了吗？被沙子埋了吗？提问：村子被风吹到了吗？（没有）被沙埋了吗？（没有）被洪水淹没了吗？（没有）那么，小朋友想想树还有什么更大的作用？（防风、防沙、防洪）（四）复习巩固树的作用通过启发提问，使幼儿加深印象，说出树的几种作用。

（五）游戏:"我是小法官"看图片探讨人类对树的破坏与保护。

（六）律动：学种树师：小朋友，我们知道树的作用那么大，它为我们做了许多好事，我们要多种树，让我们一起种树吧。

音乐起（律动），幼儿随教师动作挖坑、栽树、浇水，小树发芽长大，小朋友高高兴兴拍手、跳舞。

附故事：

从前，有一个美丽的村子，它的周围种了好多树。在离村子不远处，住着三个恶魔王，风魔王、雨魔王、沙魔王。有一天，这三个恶魔王凑到一起要比试本领，风魔王说："我的本领最大，我可以把村子吹得稀巴烂！"雨魔王说："我的本领大，我拼命下雨形成洪水，把村子全淹没！"沙魔王说"你们的本领都不如我大，我可以把村子用沙全埋了！"他们的话被过路小喜鹊听到了，小喜鹊赶快把这个消息告诉了全村的人，人们听了非常害怕，，可是又没有办法，决定离开这个美丽的地方。这时，忽然听到大森林里树叶"哗哗"作响，一个声音在喊着："别害怕，我会保护你们的！"风魔王来了，它鼓起腮帮子"呼呼"拼命地吹，雨魔王来了，倾盆大雨"哗哗"地下，沙魔王来了，狂风卷着黄沙"呜呜"地刮……

树木学课件(篇12)

活动目标：

1.初步认识环境与人类生存的关系，教育幼儿爱护花草树木。

2.培养幼儿的环保意识和能力。

3.了解树木和人类的关系。

4.培养幼儿对事物的好奇心，乐于大胆探究和实验。

5.培养探索自然的兴趣。

活动准备：

沙尘暴纪录片一盘;树木作用幻灯片一组;树宝宝头饰一个。

活动过程：

(一)导入部分：观看纪录片，引出课题。

师：“今天，老师带来一张光盘，大家看里面介绍了一件什么事情?”

提问：你刚刚看到了什么?沙尘暴是什么样子的?它给人们的生活带来什么不便?沙尘暴是怎么形成的?为什么会有沙暴尘?

(二)展开部分：介绍树木与人类的关系

出示树宝宝，以树宝宝的口吻询问幼儿：

小朋友你们知道我们树木对人类有哪些帮助吗?

结合幼儿回答情况，演示幻灯片。

如果地球上没有了我们会是什么样子的?

我们很愿意与你们做朋友，大家又应该怎样对待我们呢?

教育幼儿爱护树木，保护环境。

最后让幼儿讲一件自己亲眼所见或听说到的受到大自然惩罚的例子，并且打算怎样做一名保护环境的小卫士。

活动反思：

三月正是植树的好时节，结合3月12日植树节，可以向幼儿进行树木方面的有关知识教育。树木与我们人类有着密切的关系，对人类的贡献巨大，但是幼儿在此方面的知识储备不多，对树木的了解不够。如果只是说教性的教育幼儿爱护树木，收效不是很大。但是，如果幼儿清楚了树木对人类的关系，在现实生活中就会很自然的想到要保护树木，爱护树木，形成一种自觉的行为，这比单纯地说教要有效果。

通过树木与人类的关系，又引伸出环境保护问题。水土流失、森林砍伐，使人类赖以生存的.资源迅速衰竭。应该让幼儿明白，环境的好坏会直接影响到整个人类的生活质量和生存发展。因此，保护环境是我们现在最重要、最迫切的问题。而本次活动的重点是了解树木与人类生存的关系;难点是树立幼儿的环保意识，知护环境道保的重要性和迫切性，本次活动基本能够完成。

数蛤蟆课件(收藏十一篇)

为了促进学生掌握上课知识点，老师需要提前准备教案，老师在写教案课件时还需要花点心思去写。只有教案课件老师写越充分，课堂氛围当然也会更好。由幼儿教师教育网编辑为您挑选这篇文章名为“数蛤蟆课件”，希望这些资料可以对你的工作和学习起到实质性的推动作用！

数蛤蟆课件 篇1

活动中为了达到第一个目标：唱准6 1 6 1 2之处。我设计了一个小游戏，与幼儿一起玩青蛙跳水的游戏。请每个幼儿用手指来做蛤蟆跳水的动作，我的手做湖面，与幼儿互动，幼儿一个个的跳的同时，我在唱着“蛤蟆跳下水”的乐句。帮助幼儿在游戏中保持倾听的兴趣。因此幼儿在演唱过程中，基本上都能唱准这一乐句。由于幼儿在平时习惯了用一些简单的语句回答问题，因此幼儿在回答第一句时“一只蛤蟆几张嘴”时总是会忘记“一只蛤蟆一张嘴”中的“一只蛤蟆”而用“一张嘴”来代替，在歌曲中间部分的3、4两句乐句后面和前面部分都是“蛤蟆跳下水”，幼儿又只唱一句，这是我预先没有猜测到的。如果在这里我的提示性动作能够明确些，能够帮助幼儿比较完整地演唱歌曲了。

当我请许恩琦上来和我一起对唱时，他在第4乐句停顿了一下，而刘宇轩马上用太好的口气帮助其纠正，第二次当我请刘宇轩来演唱时，他同样也范了相同的错误，而同伴没有纠正他而是耐心地等待他想出正确的歌词。我抓住时机让他体会这种感受。本次活动也因此升华了教育的价值。

数蛤蟆课件 篇2

活动目标：

1.引导幼儿学习童谣，理解童谣内容并学习创编童谣。

2.培养幼儿的想象力和创编能力及语言表达能力。

3.知道青蛙是益虫，教育幼儿从小爱护青蛙。

4.鼓励幼儿敢于大胆表述自己的见解。

5.鼓励幼儿大胆的猜猜、讲讲、动动。

二、放视频，请幼儿欣赏。

1、提问幼儿：图上有什么?它们生活在什么地方?它有什么本领?我们应该怎样对待它?

2、教师小结：青蛙还有一个名字叫蛤蟆，蛤蟆是我们人类的好朋友，它会捉害虫帮助我们保护庄稼，我们要爱护它，别伤害它。

三、引导幼儿学习童谣。

1、出示一只蛤蟆，请幼儿说说蛤蟆的.特征。

(1)提问幼儿：一只蛤蟆几张嘴?几只眼睛几条腿?扑通一声跳下水。

(2)引导幼儿完整说第一段童谣。

2、出示第二只蛤蟆。

(1)教师提问幼儿：现在是几只蛤蟆?几张嘴?几只眼睛几条腿?扑通几声跳下水?

(2)引导幼儿完整说第二段童谣。

3、教师引导幼儿完整诵读整首童谣。

四、引导幼儿创编童谣。

1、出示第三只蛤蟆，教师提问幼儿：现在是几只蛤蟆?几只眼睛几条腿?扑通几声跳下水?

2、引导幼儿把创编好的童谣连起来朗诵一遍。

3、引导幼儿给童谣取名字。

五、复习童谣。

1、引导幼儿复习童谣一遍，教幼儿用方言说一遍童谣。

2、小结：今天小朋友知道了蛤蟆是我们人类的好朋友，所以，我们要保护它。还学会了朗诵童谣，又有了新的本领，你们真棒。

六、结束部分：放音乐《数蛤蟆》，师幼一起边朗诵童谣边表演。

附童谣：

数蛤蟆一只蛤蟆一张嘴，两只眼睛四条腿，扑通一声跳下水。两只蛤蟆两张嘴，四只眼睛八条腿，扑通扑通跳下水。

教学反思：

活动中为了达到第一个目标：唱准6 1 6 1 2之处。我设计了一个小游戏，与幼儿一起玩青蛙跳水的游戏。请每个幼儿用手指来做蛤蟆跳水的动作，我的手做湖面，与幼儿互动，幼儿一个个的跳的同时，我在唱着“蛤蟆跳下水”的乐句。帮助幼儿在游戏中保持倾听的兴趣。因此幼儿在演唱过程中，基本上都能唱准这一乐句。由于幼儿在平时习惯了用一些简单的语句回答问题，因此幼儿在回答第一句时“一只蛤蟆几张嘴”时总是会忘记“一只蛤蟆一张嘴”中的“一只蛤蟆”而用“一张嘴”来代替，在歌曲中间部分的3、4两句乐句后面和前面部分都是“蛤蟆跳下水”，幼儿又只唱一句，这是我预先没有猜测到的。如果在这里我的提示性动作能够明确些，能够帮助幼儿比较完整地演唱歌曲了。

数蛤蟆课件 篇3

教学目的：

1、理解儿歌内容，知道蛤蟆大姐穿新衣服的变化及蛤蟆大姐的.心情。

2、体会儿歌风格（幽默、诙谐），对文学作品产生浓厚的兴趣。

3、知道做事要动脑筋、有主见，不能听别人怎么说就怎么做。

教学准备：

1、儿歌《蛤蟆大姐穿新衣》

2、儿歌情节图片

3、用花布事先剪成花裙、剪刀。

教学过程：

一、出示图片，引出儿歌。

1、出示主人公蛤蟆大姐的图片，初步了解蛤蟆大姐的形象。

2、蛤蟆大姐好开心啊，穿了一件新花裙。蛤蟆大姐身上会发生什么有趣的事呢？下面我们一起欣赏儿歌《蛤蟆大姐穿新衣》。

二、听儿歌，理解儿歌内容。

儿歌：

蛤蟆大姐真高兴，穿件衣裙新又新。

小兔见了把头摇：“不如田鼠花花袄。”

花裙改成花花袄，蛤蟆大姐眯眯笑。

青蛙肚子鼓啊鼓：“不如小鹿花花裤。”

花袄改成花花裤，蛤蟆大姐跳起舞。

小狗眼睛斜一斜：“不如花猫蝴蝶结。”

花裤改成蝴蝶结，蛤蟆乐得像过节。

蛤蟆大姐伸出手，摸摸头顶光溜溜。

蝴蝶结，没法戴，哭得眼泪流呀流。

1、感受儿歌诙谐、幽默的风格，提出问题：小朋友们听了这首儿歌有什么感受呢？

2、组织幼儿看视频，感受儿歌内容，掌握蛤蟆大姐花裙的变化过程，蛤蟆大姐的花裙都发生了什么变化？

3、分段落理解儿歌

第一段：

谁看见了？小兔见了怎么做、怎么说？“不如”是什么意思？

蛤蟆接受了小兔的建议吗？它是怎么做的？（幼儿适当学说）

第二段：

蛤蟆大姐听了谁的意见？青蛙给了什么意见？

第三段：

蛤蟆大姐又听了谁的意见？小狗给了什么意见？“斜一斜”表示什么意思？

第四段：

后来蛤蟆大姐带上蝴蝶结了吗？为什么呢？它头上光溜溜的，如何带上蝴蝶结？真搞笑！

三、念儿歌。

1、观看图片念儿歌。

2、分角色朗诵、表演儿歌。

四、情感理解：

最后蛤蟆大姐为什么没有穿上新衣服？小朋友喜欢蛤蟆大姐吗？

无论做什么事情都应当动脑筋，有主见，不要像蛤蟆大姐一样听别人怎么说自己就怎么做。

数蛤蟆课件 篇4

活动目标：

1、通过观察、猜想的方法，帮助幼儿了解故事内容，初步体会故事角色的情感变化。

2、理解故事中的秘诀，鼓励幼儿遇到困难、危险时勇敢、机智地面对。

活动准备：PPT。

活动过程：

一、导入。

师：今天，老师带来了一本有意思的故事书，我们一看这是关于谁的故事？（播放幻灯1）幼：蛤蟆、两只蛤蟆

师：这是一对感情非常好的爷爷和孙子，看起来蛤蟆爷爷好像在对小蛤蟆说话，他们会说些什么呢？我们一起去故事中找找答案吧。（播放幻灯2）二、分段播放课件，幼儿猜想故事梗概。

1、遭遇大蛇--秘诀一：勇敢。

A、猜猜它是谁？

师：有一天，蛤蟆爷爷和小蛤蟆在森林里散步。蛤蟆爷爷告诉小蛤蟆，在森林里有很多饥饿的敌人，会来吃我们。爷爷有对付他们的秘诀哦！还没说完，草丛里出现了一个可怕的脑袋。它会是谁呢？（播放幻灯3,个别幼儿猜测）B、小蛤蟆的反应师：我们一起看看到底是谁。（播放幻灯4）原来是一条大蛇！大蛇吐着信子，咝咝地说：我要把你们当午饭吃了。小蛤蟆听到了是怎么做的？（引导幼儿从小蛤蟆的表情、动作来回答）师：你是怎么看出来的？

C、蛤蟆爷爷的做法师：你们观察得真仔细！面对像蛇这么危险的敌人时，小蛤蟆逃走了，蛤蟆爷爷会怎么做呢？

你们的猜想让我觉得蛤蟆爷爷真勇敢，那我们一看蛤蟆爷爷到底是怎么做的。（播放幻灯5）谁来说说你看到了什么？

D、师：没错，蛤蟆爷爷露出了凶狠的表情，使劲地吸进好多空气，把自己的身体越鼓越大，就这样把大蛇给吓跑了。蛤蟆爷爷用自己的行动告诉小蛤蟆对付敌人的第一个秘诀：勇敢。小蛤蟆高兴地说：爷爷，你真勇敢！

2、遭遇鳄龟--秘诀二：机智。

A、猜猜它是谁？

师：蛤蟆爷爷刚把大蛇赶走，正要跟小蛤蟆说说对付敌人的第二个秘诀时，草丛里又出现了一个可怕的脑袋，它会是谁呢？（播放幻灯6,个别幼儿猜测）B、小蛤蟆的反应师：会是比大蛇还可怕的动物吗，我们放大了看一下。（播放幻灯7）原来是鳄龟！鳄龟非常饿，看到蛤蟆爷爷和小蛤蟆就恶狠狠地说："喂，蛤蟆，我要把你们当点心吃了。"小蛤蟆听到了是怎么做的？（引导幼儿从小蛤蟆的表情、动作来回答）师：你是怎么看出来的？

C、蛤蟆爷爷的做法师：你们观察得真仔细！看到比蛇还要大好多、特别凶狠的鳄龟，小蛤蟆忘记了勇敢又一次逃走了，蛤蟆爷爷是怎么做的？（播放幻灯8）你看到了什么？（幼：在说话）师：蛤蟆爷爷在和鳄龟说什么呢？（幼儿猜想）D、师：你们的猜想让我觉得蛤蟆爷爷不仅勇敢，还特别聪明。那我们一起来听听蛤蟆爷爷到底用了什么秘诀。蛤蟆爷爷面对比大蛇还可怕的鳄龟时，还是那么勇敢地站出来保护小蛤蟆。他凑近鳄龟的耳朵低声地说："鳄龟先生，你想吃大餐吗？告诉你，刚才有一条又肥又嫩的蛇游过去了，你赶紧追，还能追得上。"说着，还给鳄龟指了方向。鳄龟走了，蛤蟆爷爷用自己的智慧告诉小蛤蟆对付敌人的第二个秘诀：机智。小蛤蟆高兴地说：爷爷，你真聪明！

3、遭遇怪兽--秘诀三：朋友。

A、小蛤蟆、蛤蟆爷爷的反应师：蛤蟆爷爷正想告诉小蛤蟆对付敌人的第三个秘诀时，大树后面出现了什么？（播放幻灯9）幼：一条尾巴

师：会是谁的尾巴呢？我们放大图片看看。（播放幻灯10）哇！这是一头巨大无比的怪兽！他大声地说：我要把你们全都吃掉。这次小蛤蟆是怎么做的？

师：蛤蟆爷爷呢？（在幻灯10处点击一下出现爷爷的图片）B、蛤蟆爷爷遭遇危险时，猜想小蛤蟆的做法师：可是这个怪兽太厉害了，一下子就抓住了蛤蟆爷爷。（播放幻灯11）逃到草丛边的小蛤蟆他害怕极了，全身发抖，那他会去救自己的爷爷吗？

师：看来你们都希望小蛤蟆能学会勇敢。那它会想什么办法救自己的爷爷呢？

C、故事中小蛤蟆的做法师：你们的小蛤蟆不仅勇敢，还用了聪明的方法去救爷爷。那故事中的小蛤蟆会用什么办法我们来看一看。（播放幻灯12）小蛤蟆看到草从里的红果子，想到了一个办法，它把红果子扔向怪兽，怪兽的腿上立刻出现了红斑。怪兽一点都没发现，因为他正要吃蛤蟆爷爷。小蛤蟆勇敢地站到怪兽面前，说了些话，怪兽吓得马上丢掉了蛤蟆爷爷，飞快地逃走了。（播放幻灯13）小蛤蟆对怪兽说了什么呢，居然让怪兽那么害怕？（幼儿猜想）D、师：哈哈（没错），小蛤蟆说：怪兽，你已经中了爷爷的毒了，快看你的脚，都是红点点，你死定了！小蛤蟆就这样把怪兽给吓跑了。小蛤蟆用了爷爷的秘诀了吗？是什么秘诀？（幼：勇敢、机智）E、第三个秘诀师：这下爷爷得救了，他高兴地对小蛤蟆说："爷爷的第三个秘诀就是在最危险的时候，有一个靠得住的朋友。是你的勇敢、机智、爱心救了我。谢谢你，小蛤蟆！"师：爷爷的第三个秘诀是什么？（幼：朋友、爱心）三、完整欣赏故事。

1、猜想故事题目。

师：蛤蟆爷爷的秘诀真厉害！（播放幻灯14）故事讲完了，我们又回到了封面。这个封面缺了一个题目，你们觉得什么题目合适呢？让我们来看看会是什么题目呢？（点击幻灯片）2、完整倾听故事。

师：那我们完整地欣赏这本书吧。《蛤蟆爷爷的秘诀》……（教师讲述故事）四.结束1.故事讲完了，你们喜欢这个故事吗？（喜欢）你们回去后可以讲给中班，小班的小弟弟小妹妹听，让他们也学会蛤蟆爷爷的秘诀勇敢，机智的面对危险和困难。

数蛤蟆课件 篇5

《花蛤蟆》这首歌在几个版的教材中都出现了，这首歌深受孩子们的喜爱，歌曲音乐情绪诙谐，曲调比较容易上口。 ×× × ×│×× × ×│×. × ××│×－－ │ ×× × ×│×× × ×│×. × ××│×－－ │

反思这节课，孩子们在倚音的演唱上刚开始有些不适应。

充分的发挥孩子们在课堂上的主体性。老师只是引导者。在装饰音的学习上我告诉孩子们如果将一首歌曲旋律比喻成一件漂亮的衣服的话，那么这件衣服上那些闪闪发亮的美丽的花边就一定会是我们音乐旋律曲中那活泼可爱的装饰音符。装饰音是歌曲旋律中不可缺失的一部分，如果少了这些美丽的花边，那么这件衣服绝对会让你没有任何兴致穿上它。而且是在旋律恰当的位置上出现会为歌曲增添音乐情趣。试着唱一唱，体会一下有和没有旋律是不是给我们不同的感觉。

本课不足之处是学生在八分休止符和四分休止符的节奏学习在视唱中不太准确，易混淆。在演唱中学生控制不了气息，唱到后面就容易喊唱起来。在后面的歌曲里继续纠正学生的喊唱问题。

虽然这是我一节我上过多年的老课，但是自己每次我都有新的对这首歌的体会和新的发现，把这些新的`发现记录下来争取更好地提高。

数蛤蟆课件 篇6

目标：

1.愿意在同伴面前讲述自己的想法，提高口语表达能力。

2.知道种瓜是一件不容易的事，不能太着急。

准备：

1.挂图。

2.故事磁带。

3.西瓜(哈密瓜、甜瓜)一只。

过程：

1.倾听故事。

――出示西瓜(哈密瓜、甜瓜)，请幼儿说出名称，激发幼儿的兴趣。

――有一只蛤蟆也想种瓜，我们来听听蛤蟆种瓜的故事。

2.播放故事录音，请幼儿倾听。

――结合挂图，讲述故事第二遍。

――蛤蟆见种子没有长出来，它是怎么想的，又是怎么做的?

――青蛙告诉蛤蟆，种子怎样才会长出来?

――蛤蟆睡了很久很久，醒来发现了什么?它是怎么说的?

3.讨论。

――蛤蟆想的那些方法有用吗?

――为什么蛤蟆会说种瓜是一件不容易的事?

附：蛤蟆种瓜蛤蟆看见青蛙在种瓜，他也要种瓜。他刚把种子种在地里，就对种子喊：“种子，种子，快快长出来吧!”

过了一会儿，种子没有长出来。蛤蟆又趴在地上大声喊：“种子听见了没有，现在就长出来!”种子没有长出来。

青蛙跑过来，对蛤蟆说：“你那么大声地喊，会吓坏种子的。种子睡在地里，阳光照着它们，小雨浇着它们，慢慢就会长出来了。”

到了晚上，蛤蟆又着急了。他说：“种子大概怕黑吧，我给你们讲故事、唱歌。”蛤蟆点上蜡烛，给种子讲了一个很长很长的故事，唱了好多好多的歌。

蛤蟆讲一会儿，看一看;唱一会儿，看一看。种子一直没有长出来。蛤蟆累了，倒在地上“呼呼”睡着了，睡了很久很久。

“蛤蟆，蛤蟆，快起来，快来看你种的瓜。”青蛙叫醒了蛤蟆。蛤蟆往地上一瞧，哇，长出了许多青青的小苗。

青蛙说：“青青的小苗会慢慢长大，以后会结出许多许多瓜。”蛤蟆打了个呵欠，说：“种瓜真不容易啊!”

教学反思：

我觉得本节课基本上达成了教学目标，充分的提高了幼儿愿意在同伴面前讲述自己的想法，和口语表达能力，同时也知道种瓜是一件不容易的事，不能太着急。这个活动的重点不是理解种植的有关知识，而是让幼儿在校生领悟一个道理;种瓜不是一种容易的事情，因而，蛤蟆种瓜时的焦急心情与滑稽可笑的行为应该予以充分渲染。

数蛤蟆课件 篇7

花蛤蟆

教学内容：

一、声音造型荷塘欢歌

二、学唱歌曲花蛤蟆

三、表现歌曲花蛤蟆

教学目标：

一、通过学唱《花蛤蟆》，领会歌曲描绘的意境，感受当地儿童的生活情趣。

二、通过表现歌曲《花蛤蟆》培养学生音乐表现力及合作意识。

三、通过声音造型《荷塘欢歌》培养学生即兴创作的能力。

教学重点、难点：

唱好歌曲中的倚音，积极主动的表现歌曲是重点;声音造型是难点。

教学准备

课件、录音机、磁带、头饰(荷花、荷叶)、手巾花、打击乐(双响筒、木鱼、蛙鸣筒、舞板)

教学时间：一课时

教学过程

一、组织教学。

听曲入室，师生问好。

快乐节奏三分钟，引导学生用青蛙的叫声来模仿各种节奏。

二、声音造型游戏：荷塘欢歌

出示课件“荷花图”：这么美的荷花池，到夏天的时候会有很多青蛙蛤蟆来与荷花做伴并唱歌，下面我们用青蛙的叫声来营造“荷塘欢歌”的景象。

请同学们想好一个蛤蟆叫的节奏，师随意点名模仿，看谁的节奏创作得。

请一名同学上台像老师一样指挥，师和其他同学坐在一起模仿。

三、学习歌曲《花蛤蟆》。

1、老师这里有首歌也是表现夏夜荷塘欢腾的景象的，请听。(放录音)

请你根据歌词唱的内容描述花蛤蟆有趣的样子。

边听歌曲边请几名同学把歌词描绘的花蛤蟆画到黑板上。

全班朗读歌词检查各位选手的画。

2、这首歌有几处花蛤蟆的叫声?请找出来。这些模仿蛤蟆的叫声都用了哪种装饰音?(倚音、下滑音)

跟琴学唱这四个乐句。

3、再听歌曲，找出你已经听会的乐句教大家唱一唱。

4、师生交流：你还有哪几句不会唱，请大家来帮帮你。

跟琴唱不熟悉的乐句。

5、齐唱全曲。

6、歌唱前加入花蛤蟆叫声投入演唱歌曲。

四、表现歌曲《花蛤蟆》。

1、自由选择小组：歌唱组、表演组、打击乐伴奏组。

2、分组设计、创作队形、练习。

3、集体演绎。

4、评出优秀表演队、绩优秀创意队。

五、结束。

听曲出室。

数蛤蟆课件 篇8

各位尊敬的评委、老师：

大家好！

我是来自张公小学的xx。我说课的题目是《数蛤蟆》，下面我按照六个环节进行说课。

一、教材分析：

本节课的教学内容选自人民音乐出版社小学音乐二年级上册第九课。《数蛤蟆》是一首四川童谣，它的歌词和曲调具有一定的民族特色，学生听起来风趣幽默，但学习起来却有一定难度。

二、学情分析:

本堂课面对的是二年级的小朋友，虽然他们对事物好奇，而且好动，愿意参加各种活动，模仿力较强，能模仿简单节奏，但是他们以形象思维为主，对音乐认知还不够，所以我设计利用多媒体的直观性，来辅助学生对音乐进行认知。

三、教学目标：

根据教材内容和二年级学生认知特点，我确定本课的教学目标为：

1、学生唱会歌曲《数蛤蟆》。

2、学生找出歌曲中旋律、节奏相同的乐句。

3、学生为歌曲创编歌词，培养学生的创造力。

4、激发培养学生对音乐的兴趣，并树立环保意识，保护益虫从我做起。

四、教学重、难点：

由教学目标和学生认知水平，我确定以下教学重难点：

教学重点：

能用轻松、愉快有感情的声音熟练地演唱歌曲《数蛤蟆》。

教学难点：

找出歌曲《数蛤蟆》中旋律、节奏相同的乐句，为歌曲编创歌词。

五、说教法：

根据新课程标准，在本课我采用了情景教学法、模仿教学法、直观教学法。

六、教学流程：

为达成本节课的教学目标及重难点，我设计了下面的教学环节：

1、快乐猜谜，揭示课题。

首先以小朋友喜欢的猜谜语引出本课的主角蛤蟆。播放图片，向小朋友介绍蛤蟆的本领，激起孩子们对蛤蟆的喜爱之情，并揭示课题。

2、看动画，回答问题。

播放动画视频《数蛤蟆》，让小朋友带着问题观看动画。看一看动画中地上有什么，水里有些什么，然后分小组讨论进行汇报。

3、师生游戏、学习歌曲。

先播放本课中的歌曲，让孩子初听音乐，从中感受欢快的节奏。之后请小朋友来当老师的小回声的游戏，学习歌曲中的节奏。我准备了歌曲中的三条节奏，用手拍打，让学生模仿；然后出示歌词，师生按照节奏读歌词，同时手拍节奏；最后师弹钢琴以问唱的方式，引导学生答唱，这样互助学习歌曲。师生互助学习，这样练习了学生的模仿能力、协调能力和反应能力。接着播放《数蛤蟆》音乐，让孩子先听一遍，对比一下，再完整地跟唱一次。

4、反复实践、辨别乐句。

结合学习歌曲时拍打的节奏，来引导小朋友找出旋律、节奏相同的乐句，用一样的颜色标出来，然后小组分工合唱歌曲。

5、师生合作、分工完成音乐会。

学生分组演唱，给演唱的同学分发蛤蟆头饰，戴着头饰演唱。没有唱的同学拍节拍，老师弹钢琴一起完成演唱会。

6、开动脑筋、编创歌词。

最后是为歌曲编创第二、三段歌词的环节，我在课件中，制作并出示第二只和第三只蛤蟆的出现，学生对直观形象的画面，乐于接受、易于理解。有了多媒体信息的加入缩短了学生认识事物的时间，使课堂变得更有趣味。把小朋友回答的歌词填入歌曲之中唱一唱。

7、德育渗透

学习了《数蛤蟆》这课之后，对孩子进行思想教育：我们了解了蛤蟆是益虫，是我们的好朋友，教导小朋友应该保护蛤蟆、保护动物、还要爱护我们身边的花草树木，更应该保护人类生存的环境。

数蛤蟆课件 篇9

活动名称：数蛤蟆(大班音乐活动)

活动目标：

1. 让幼儿了解这是一首四川民歌，知道四川方言中把青蛙称做"蛤蟆"，使幼儿通过数蛤蟆的嘴、眼、腿，对青蛙有出步的了解和认识.

2. 初步掌握歌曲的旋律，提高幼儿演唱技能，训练幼儿用各种感官(耳听旋律、眼看画面、嘴说歌词、身体动作)来感受歌曲的内容，增强幼儿的感受力和节奏感

3. 教育小朋友要从小爱护小动物.

活动重点：在熟悉歌曲之后，能够会表演.

活动难点：让幼儿掌握歌曲的内容及其旋律.

活动准备：环境布置(池塘)，青蛙头饰，录音机，磁带，课件.

活动过程：

一. 开始部分

1谜语引出-主题"青蛙"。

2听音乐做模仿动作，进入活动室.

二基本部分

1问话方式.

2欣赏、示范、表演、比赛.

3欣赏青蛙的演变过程.

4观看青蛙怎样捉虫从而进行品德教育.

结束部分：幼儿扮成青蛙在布置好的池塘里尽情的玩耍、捉虫等，自然结束本节课.

活动反思：

本次活动获得了较好的效果，我个人认为主要有以下几方面的特点：

1、选材成功：没有歌词却很有特色音响效果的律动。《数青蛙》配上一首幼儿较熟悉，且有琅琅上口有节奏的儿歌《数青蛙》，使音乐、语言与动作的结合得到最充分的表达，形成一幅青蛙边歌边舞的热闹完美图景。

2、程序设计：采用声势活动练习→嗓音造型练习→动作造型练习→图谱识记练习→游戏练习的方式引导幼儿一步一步循序渐进地调动原有的经验来学习新知识，使幼儿脑中的旧知识得到激活，进行重新组合与匹配形成新知识。

3、教学有法而无定法：始终遵循幼儿音乐活动设计的一个重要原则，即幼儿是音乐活动的主体，活动设计就须从幼儿的兴趣和音乐作品满足幼儿发展的需要出发，体现活动设计的灵活性和自主性。

数蛤蟆课件 篇10

目标：

1、让幼儿初步了解故事的内容，能讲出故事的主要情节。

2、提高幼儿的语言表达能力。

3、教育幼儿不乱扔瓜皮果壳，进一步培养幼儿良好的行为以及生活卫生习惯。

4、培养幼儿的观察、操作、表达能力，提高幼儿的审美情趣及创新意识。

5、培养幼儿勇敢、活泼的个性。

中班语言优秀教案《瓜瓜吃瓜》

准备：

图书一本

过程：

一、导入活动，引起幼儿的兴趣。

师：小朋友。你们看，老师带来了什么呀？对！这是一只西瓜，告诉你们，有个小朋友的名字叫瓜瓜，为什么叫瓜瓜呢？你没想不想知道呀？现在我们一起来听一听，好吗？

（出示图片，老婆婆摔交的图片）问：图上有谁？她怎么拉？怎么会这样的？（鼓励幼儿大胆发挥想象，说出自己的想法）

二、教师完整地讲述故事一遍。提问：

1、你听到故事里说了些什么？

2、人民为什么叫他瓜瓜？

3、瓜瓜他是怎样吃西瓜的？吃完西瓜后他又是怎样做的？

4、结果发生了什么事？

三、教师再次完整地讲述一遍。（边看图边讲故事）提问：

1、瓜瓜有没有吃到外婆的西瓜？为什么？

2、后来，外婆摔了一跤后，瓜瓜是怎样想的？又是怎样做的呢？

四、引导幼儿边看图边讲述故事。

五、讨论：

1、你喜欢瓜瓜吗？为什么？

2、如果你是瓜瓜，你会怎样做？

3、出示有关这方面的图片。引导幼儿观察，说一说图中的小朋友谁是对的？谁是错的？错在哪儿？应该怎样做？（教育幼儿不要乱扔垃圾，做一个爱清洁、讲卫生的孩子。）

教学反思：

整个活动过程，思路比较清晰，教态自然，能够根据教案的流程来上课。但是整个活动过程的气氛有点沉，不能够体现幼儿对活动的乐趣。

本文扩展阅读：瓜，汉语常用字，读作guā，最早见于金文。瓜是"苽"和"蓏"的本字，其本义是挂在藤上的葫芦状果实，后引申为形状如瓜的饰物、仪仗、兵器之类的器物，又引申为瓜成熟、瓜分等含义。

数蛤蟆课件 篇11

教学目标：

1.“春天”、“春雨”、“小鸟”都向人们“致春天”的来临，本课汇编了一组描绘春意的音乐作品。让我们在音乐的感染下，进一步激发对大自然的热爱。

2.聆听《春水》，感受拟人化的“春水”活泼、顽皮的形象。聆听《致春天》，感受乐曲对春天的描绘，尤其是第一与第三乐段，相同的曲调，不同的手法表现不同的情绪。让我们在聆听过程中体验音乐丰富的表现力。

3.表演《小鸟小鸟》、《春雨蒙蒙地下》，歌曲借景抒情，运用不同的节拍、节奏表达对春天的赞美。在学唱过程中学习切分节奏及乐句的重复、变化(相似)重复的创作手法。

教材分析：

《小鸟小鸟》是故事片《苗苗》的插曲。曲调欢悦而又奔放，充分表现了少年儿童在春意盎然的春天里，热爱大自然的美好情趣。歌曲为6/8拍，二段体结构。第一段(13小节)为齐唱，第二乐段为合唱。每段均由两个变化重复的大乐句组成，音乐素材十分精炼而集中。第一乐段以每三个音构成一个活泼、欢乐的音乐动机“”这个主导乐汇以先上行模进、后下行模进贯穿其中，给人以明亮、轻快的感觉，表现了少年儿童像一只快乐的小鸟在祖国明媚的春光里自由飞翔欢乐幸福的形象。第二乐段是副歌性的合唱，曲调在六度大跳后紧接连续同音反复和下行级进进行，并用“”这样的节奏，配以连贯的衬词“啦啦啦……”一气呵成，使得歌曲的情绪更加热情欢乐，抒发了少年儿童对美好生活的热爱和幸福欢乐的情感。

1.介绍作曲家的国籍及作品的背景为导入。

(1)设问：“挪威”地处欧洲的哪里?那里的气候条件如何?

(2)讲解：春天对地处北欧的挪威人民是多么的美好，作曲家格里格热情地谱写了这首钢琴抒情小品。

2.视听《致春天》。

(1)设问：你能根据伴奏及旋律的不同表现手法区分作品的段落吗?

(2)教师可适时指导，如听第一段的主题片段，以及第二段再现主题的片段。还可帮助学生听辨第二部分的低音区的伴奏片段等，以降低学生听赏中的困难，帮助他们听辨三段体的不同情绪的音乐表现。

3.复听《致春天》。

要求学生在座位上用脸部的表情或微小动作，表达出三段音乐在发展过程中的情绪变化。

4.完成教材中的书面作业。

(1)画出第三部分的图形谱，说明第一与第三部分旋律是相同的，

但情绪不同。

如用同样的线条，可以用线条的粗细表达其热烈的情景。还可以根据想像在图形谱上添加其他的图画等。

(2)完成方格框内的选择－－曲调高、低与情绪的平静、期待、热烈。

以上两个书面作业，因为是在学生通过二次欣赏作品的基础上独立完成或学生间的相互讨论完成，切忌教师包办代替，要充分发挥学生的想像与联想。

5.三度(欣赏)创作。

让学生根据自己的理解，用舞蹈动作即兴表演对春天来临时人们的祈望心情，要把三段的发展变化过程能表达出来。不求动作和舞姿的优美，主要是体现学生的自主参与及他们对春天的向往的心情。

高一英语课件收藏十二篇

教案课件是老师工作中的一部分，老师还没有写的话现在也来的及。教案是激发学生求知欲的有效方式，写教案课件包括哪几个部分？想要更好地掌握“高一英语课件”的知识幼儿教师教育网小编为您推荐这篇文章，希望我们的建议能够为您提供一些灵感和指导！

高一英语课件 篇1

I. 汉英翻译

1、发生……，结果…… 6、占有，占领

2、在世界的另一端 7、查询，提出

3、对……乐观 8、庆祝教师节

4、身体健康 9、由…组成构成

5、自求之路 10、开始干某事

II单词拼写

1 .It was very (大方) of you to lend them your new car for their holiday.

2.T he man (威胁) the little girl with a knife.

3.He was (极度) angry at the news.

4.They set out for the (远征) to the south pole.

5.Afrer (毕业)，he took a job as a typist.

6.When he woke up, he found some people (包围)him.

7. (农业)has been playing an important role in our country. .

8.In the end , the city was taken (拥有)of by the Red Army.

9.Active (山水)may empty at any time.

10.There are a lot of (埋葬)grounds at the foot or middle of the hill.

III单项选择

1.It will be two months Jane leaves school.

What will of her ?

She is going to be a teacher.

A. when, happen B. before, become

C. after, take place D. since, instead

2. I saw her, I was struck by her beauty.

A.When the first time B.During the first time

C.For the first time D.The first time

3.I was having my supper he called on me without any appointment made me unhappy.

A.before, as B.while, it C.as, that D.when, which

4.It was dark; we decided to for the nigt at a farmhouse.

A.put away B.put dowm C.put up D.put out

5.Hard work success while failure laziness.

A. leads up; lies to B. leads to; lies in

C. leads on; lies of D. lead down; lies by

6.I can guess you were in a hurry, you your sweater inside out.

A.would wear B.wore C.had worn D.are wearing

7.I had an accident a car and I was woozy hitting the car door.

A.of; by B.with; by C.with; from D.on; from

8.Mary, I didn’t recognize you at the party.

I my hair and sunglasses.

A.have cut ; wear B. had cut; was wearing

C.cut; put on D.was cuttimg; was putting on

for women seems men ,due to the tradition and the society.

A. twice difficult as B. as difficult as

C. twice as difficult as D. twice as difficult than

10.I can’t get the book on the top shelf, for it is my reach.

A. within B.beyond C.out D.from

11.Huang shan is famous its landscape and known a place of interest the world.

A.for; as ; to B.with;for; by C.to; for; wifh D.by; as; for

12.Girls one third of the total student population in our school, which 5678 students.

A.make of; is made up B.make up ; is made up of

C.make from; make up D.made into ;make up of

13.China has a population of 1.3 billion, _____are Han Nationality.

A. most of it B.two thirds of whom

C.70% of which D.mainly of them

14._____of the city lies a lake.

A.To east B.In east C.On east D.East

IV.课文填词

1.It has often been_____that life is difficult as it is.

2.What has______her?

3.On November 12th the storm died______.

4.I couldn’t ______my left leg and my head was woozy from hitting the ground.

5.I did so______regret.

6.He lives in a town ______the east coast.

7.Hainan Island is ______the south of Guangdong province.

8.Henan province lies _____central china.

9.The ship hit a rock _____the west coast of the pacific.

The Key

I :

1.to become of 2.at the opposite end of the world

3.to be oppotimistic about 4.to be in good health

5.the way of self rescue 6.to take possession of

7.to refer fo 8.to celebrate Teachers’ day

9.to be made up of 10.turn to doing something

II

1.generous 2.threatened 3.extremely 4.expedition 5.graduation 6.surrounding 7.Agriculture 8.possession 9.volcanoes 10.burial

III

1--5BDDCB 6-10 DCBCB 11---14ACBD

IV:

1.said 2.become of 3.dowm 4.stand on 5.without 6.on 7.on 8.in 9.off

高一英语课件 篇2

1. dress up

2. celebrate & congratulate

3. would & used to

4. as well as & as well

5. as much as

6. each time & time-clause

7. Earth Day

8. Day Off & Day On

9. the living and the dead

10. rather & fairly, quite, pretty, very 表示程度

11. April Fool's Day

12. play tricks on sb

13. take in

14. decorate

15. jealous & envy

16. grave & tomb

17. lunar calendar & solar calendar

Word Study

1. theme

⑴ a subject of a talk or piece of writing 题目；主题；话题

Stamp collecting was the theme of his talk.

⑵ an idea that is developed or repeated in the work of a writer or artist

主题,中心思想

2. dress up (Point 1)

⑴ put on one's best or special clothes穿上盛装

All the family members dressed up for the party.

⑵ make sth or sb more attractive, as with clothing装饰;使变得更具魅力

⑶ put on a costume for fun or clothes for a part in a play 化装

Mary was dressed up to play Cinderella in her school play.

3. parade: an occasion when a group of people stand or walk in a

procession so that people can look at them 游行 ;行进

there used to be a military parade in Red square on I May.

4. Ramadan: the ninth month of the year in the Moslem calendar 斋月

5. Arabic: of or relating to Arabia, the Arabs, their language, or their culture.

阿拉伯人的(尤指其语言或其文学)

㈠ Arab: a member of an Arabic-speaking people; a member of a people

who lived originally in Arabia and who now live in many part of the

Middle East and North Africa 阿拉伯人

㈡ Arabia: a peninsula of southwest Asia between the Red Sea and the

Persian Gulf. Politically, it includes Saudi Arabia, Yemen, Oman, the

United Arab Emirates, Qatar, Bahrain, and Kuwait. Arabia has an

estimated one third of the world's oil reserves.阿拉伯半岛

亚洲西南部的一个半岛，位于红海与波斯湾之间。政治上它包

括沙特阿拉伯、也门、阿曼、阿联酋、卡塔尔、巴林及科威特。据估计，

阿拉伯半岛拥有世界储油量的三分之一

㈢ Arabian: of Arabia, esp the peninsula consisting Saudi Arabia and

several other countries 阿拉伯的, 阿拉伯人的

Arabian bird 凤凰 Arabian jasmine 白茉莉

Arabian camel (阿拉伯产的)单峰驼

Arabian Nights《一千零一夜》(《天方夜谭》)

㈣ Arabic : the Semitic language or writing of the Arabs which is the main

language of North Arabia, the Middle East and Arabia 阿拉伯语

6. holy

⑴connected with God or with religion and therefore very special or sacred

神圣的；上帝的

the Holy Bible 圣经

⑵ (used about a person) serving God; living according to a strict or

highly moral religious or spiritual system; pure; saintly 圣洁的

7. Easter: the Sunday in March or April when Christians celebrate Christ's

return to life 复活节

8. symbol

㈠ symbol

⑴ something that represents or suggests something else such as an idea

or quality 象征

The lion is often used as a symbol of courage.

The colour white is a symbol of purity.

In the picture the tree is the symbol of life and the snake the symbol of

evil.

⑵(for) a letter, sign or figure which expresses a sound, operation,

number, chemical substance, etc. 符号，记号, 标记

H2O is the chemical symbol for water.

In maths, x is the symbol for an unknown quantity.

The marks +、－、× and ÷ are symbols for add, subtract, multiply,

and divide.

㈡sign

⑴a standard mark, something which is seen and represents a

generally-known meaning; symbol 符号，记号

The signs for add, subtract, multiply and divide are +、－、×、÷.

A red flag was placed there as a sign of danger.

⑵a movement of the body intended to express a particular meaning or

command; signal 手势，姿势，信号

He nodded as sign of agreement.

She put her finger to her tips as a sign to be quiet.

He made a sign for me to follow him.

⑶ a notice giving information, warning, direction, etc. 标志,标记,告示

The sign by the road said ‘No Parking'.

⑷ (of) something that shows or points to the presence or likely future

existence of a particular condition, fact or quality 迹象;痕迹, 征兆

There are no signs of life about the house. 这房子没有有人住的迹象。

She saw no sign that he would change his mind.

㈢signal: something intended to warn, command, or give a message,

such as a special sound of action; a indicator, such as a gesture or

colored light, that serves as a means of communication. 信号,暗号

The railway signal showed that the train could pass.

Traffic signals tell drivers when to stop and go.

9. fighting: the occasion when people fight 战斗, 打仗

10. conflict

⑴ a fight or argument 打斗; 争执

a hand -to-hand conflict 短兵相接 a bloody conflict 血战

⑵ a difference between two or more ideas, wishes 冲突; 矛盾

conflict between the two countries 两国间的冲突

conflict between religion and science 宗教与科学之间的冲突

11. argument

⑴ a disagreement esp one that is noisy; quarrel 争论, 争辩, 争吵

The argument among the two parties was blown up by the press.夸大了

 They were having an argument about whose turn it was to do the

cooking.

They got into an argument about politics.

⑵ (for, against) a reason given to support or disprove something

论据; 理由; 理由

There are many arguments against smoking.

 This argument, however, does not hold water.

The risk of heart disease is a powerful argument against smoking.

⑶ the use of reason to decide something or persuade someone

按理; 说理; 辩论; 说服

We must settle this by argument not by fighting.

⑷ a short account of the story or subject of a book, poem, etc; summary

(文学作品的)梗概; 概要; 指要; 主题

⑸ (idm) put forward an argument 提出论点

⑹ (idm) drive an argument / a point home: make one's point clear

把论点讲透彻, 阐明观点

He drove home his point by citing specific examples.

⑺ (idm) fall into an argument with 与...发生争论

12. destruction

㈠ destruction: destroying or being destroyed摧毁；毁灭；毁坏

The fire caused the destruction of my books.

㈡ construction: building or being built 建设，建造

construction industry 建筑业

The new airport is still under construction

13. opinion

⑴ what a person thinks about sth. based on personal judgment rather

than actual facts 意见，看法， 主张

⑵ what people in general think about something 舆论

Public opinion is against him.

⑶ professional judgment or advice [专业性的] 鉴定，劝告，意见

You should get a second opinion from another doctor.

⑷ (idm) in one's opinion: as sb thinks; as information, experience lead

him to believe照某人的意见

In my opinion, he is not right.

14. major

⑴ great in size, importance, seriousness重大的; 主要的

the major part 主要部分 major subjects 主修(专业)课程

major party (有竞选力量的)主要政党

a major surgical operation 外科大手术

⑵ an officer of middle rank in the army 陆军少校

15. probably

㈠ probably: almost (but not quite) certainly; according to what is likely;

most likely; presumably 很可能地；大概

㈡ possibly: perhaps; according what is possible 或许；也许

16. honour

⑴n something that gives pride or pleasure 光荣

It was a great honour to be asked to speak at the conference.

⑵ the respect from other people that a person, country gets because of

high standards of behaviour and moral character 崇敬

⑶ v to; show great respect for sb or sth or to give sb pride or pleasure

向...表示敬意

I am very honoured by the confidence you have shown in me.

⑷ to keep a promise to do sth履行诺言

17. ancestor

㈠ ancestor: a person in your family who lived a long time before you,

from whom you are descended; forebear 祖先

Mary's ancestor settled in our country a hundred years ago.

㈡ offspring: a child or children; the young of an animal后代

㈢ descendant: a person, an animal, or a plant whose descent can be

traced to a particular individual or group 子孙

18. principle

⑴ a basic general rule or truth about sth原则；主义

We believe in the principle of equal opportunity for everyone.

⑵a rule for good behaviour, based on what each person believes is right

行为准则

a person of high moral principles

⑶ a law of science 原理/ 定律

 The system works on the principle that heat rises.

19. unity: the situation in which people are untied or in agreement

联合,团结, 统一

the unity of opposites 对立的统一

the unity of motive and effective 动机和效果的统一

Unity is strength, unity is victory. 团结就是力量, 团结就是胜利。

20. community

⑴the group of people who live in a particular place, area or country

社会, 社区

community welfare department 社会福利部

Recent increases in crime have disturbed the whole community.

⑵ a group of people who have sth in common 团体，社团，界

the Chinese community (纽约的)华侨（界）

the community of scholars 学术界

community antenna television (缩写为CATV)共用天线电视

⑶ society as a whole; the public 大众

He did it for the interests of the community. 为了公众的利益才这么做

21. nation

⑴ a people who share common customs, origins, history, and frequently

language; a nationality 民族,

the Chinese nation 中华民族

⑵ a relatively large group of people organized under a single, usually

independent government; a country 国家

a most favoured nation 最惠国 the United Nations 联合国

22. purpose: an aim or a goal; an intention or plan; a person's reason for

an action

⑴ the reason for doing or meaning sth 目的；意图

The main purpose of this meeting is to decide what we should do about the problem of noise.

⑵ having an aim or plan and acting according to it 有目标

a good leader inspires people with a sense of purpose.

⑶ (idm) on purpose: not by accident; with a particular intention

故意；蓄意

I came a it early on purpose to see if I could help you.

23. creativity: the ability to make or produce new things, especially using

skill or imagination 创造力; 艺术创新

We want teaching that encourages children's creativity.

24. faith

⑴ firm belief; trust; complete confidence 信心；信念；信任

Children usually have faith in their parents.

I have faith in his ability.

We have faith in ourselves.

We should have faith in our Party and our government.

He has faith in my ability.

I have faith in you; I am sure you will do well.

He still has great talent, but he has lost faith in himself.

⑵ (loyalty to one's) word of; honour; promise (对承诺，诺言等的)信守

You must keep faith with him.

You cannot expect your friends to trust you if you do not keep faith with

them.

Don't break faith with him.

 I kept faith with them.

I told her in all good faith that I would be there, but I wasn't able to go.

⑶ (in) belief and trust in God 对上帝的信仰

Had it not been for her great faith in God, she would have given up.

⑷ a system of religious belief; religion 宗教信仰

Faith can remove mountains.

The Christian faith

He is a member of the Catholic faith Islamic faith.

The ceremony was attended by representatives of the Christian and

Jewish faiths.

25. commercial

⑴ connected with buying and selling goods 商业的；商务的

commercial traveller 旅行推销员

A commercial college teaches things that would be useful in business.

⑵ making a profit 获得利润的；可获利的

Oil has been found in commercial quantities. 发现大量有商业价值的石油

26. joy

⑴ a feeling of great happiness 欢乐, 喜悦, 快乐，乐事, 乐趣

We'd like to wish you joy and success in your life together.

⑵ a person or thing that gives ;you great pleasure 使人高兴的人或事

That class is a joy to teach.

27. light

⑴ v make sth start to burn or shine（常与up连用）点火，点燃

Will you light the fire for me?

⑵ give light to sth so that you can see it dearly照亮；使光明

We lit the candle and the candle lit the room.

⑶to become bright with pleasure or excitement

（常与up连用）使容光焕发,喜形于色

Her face lit up with joy when she saw her mother coming.

⑷ n the natural force that takes away darkness so that objects can be seen

光，光亮

The sun gives us light during the day.

He worked by the light of a candle / the moon.

⑸sth that produces light and allows other things to be seen , such as a

lamp or torch发光物；光源; 灯

⑹adj of little weight, not heavy 轻的，不重的

The basket is very light; I can easily pick it up.

28. similar

⑴ like or alike; of the same kind; almost but not exactly the same in

nature or appearance近似的； 类似的；相似的

⑵ exactly the same in shape but not size 相似的

similar triangles have equal angles

29. generation: the children or the parents or the grandparents

⑴ a period of time in which a human being can grow up and have a family,

about 25 or 30 years 代，一代（约25 - 30年）

Members of my family have lived in this house for generations.

⑵ all the members of a family of about the same age(一家庭中的)一代人

We belong to the same generation.

 This family photo shows three generations: myself, my parents, and my

grandparents.

⑶ all people of about the same age 世代; 一代人, 同龄人

Most people of my father's generation have experienced war.

⑷ all the members of a developing class of things at a certain stage

同一时代的产物

second generation computers

⑸ the act of process of generating 产生， 生产

the generation of electricity by water-power

⑹ (idm) generation gap: the difference in ideas, feelings and interests

between older and younger people, esp. considered as causing lack of

understanding; a broad difference in values and attitudes between one

generation and another, especially between young people and their

parents 代沟，两代人之间的隔阂

How can teachers help to bridge the generation gap between parents and their teenage children?

30. play a trick on sb: deceive sb for fun or profit开某人的玩笑；欺骗某人

Tom got very angry when the other boys played a trick on him and hid

his show when he was swimming.

Don't play tricks on me I want to know the truth.

31. salute

⑴a sign that a soldier, etc makes to show respect, by raising he hand to

the forehead军礼（行举手礼、鸣礼炮、降旗礼）

The soldier saluted his officer.

⑵ an action that shows respect for sb 致敬表示

The next programme is a salute to one of the world's greatest film stars.

⑶ v to show respect with a salute（常与to连用）向… 致意，向…致敬

The soldiers saluted as they marched past the general.

This is the day on which we salute those who died in the war.

32. kiss touch someone with your lips to show your love or to say hello or

goodbye; to touch or caress with the lips as an expression of

affection, greeting, respect, or amorousness 接吻

kiss her goodbye 和其他用语

⑴ to say goodbye to sb ⑵ to wave goodbye to sb

⑶ to nod goodbye to sb ⑷ to kiss sb goodbye

⑸ Goodbye till tomorrow! ⑹ Goodbye for today.

33. cheek: one of the two parts of your face that are on each side of your

nose and mouth and below your eyes; the fleshy part of either side of

the face below the eye and between the nose and ear脸颊；面颊

Her cheeks became red after she ran up the stairs to the six floor.

34. nod

⑴ to lower and raise the head quickly, as in agreement or

acknowledgment (he act of admitting or owning to something

承认) 点头, 表示同意或致意

⑵ to let the head fall forward when sleepy 打盹；短时的小睡

He nodded off on the train. 在火车上打瞌睡

35. celebration: the act or occasion of doing sth enjoyable because sth

good has happened or because it is a special day 庆祝, 庆典

36. reminder: sb or sth that makes you remember sth.提醒的人, 暗示

We received a reminder that we hadn't paid the electricity bill.

37. respect

⑴ v to admire or have a high opinion of sb or sth

(与of, for连用) 尊敬; 尊重

I respect his courage.敬佩他的勇气

I'll respect your wishes. 尊重你的愿望

⑵ to show care for or pay attention to sb or sth; to show careful

consideration for 关心；注意；重视

We should respect other people's cultures and values.

I promise to respect your wishes.

⑶ n (for) the feeling that one admires someone or something very much

and that they or it should be treated well and honourably 尊敬; 尊重

They stood in silence for one minute as a mark of respect for the dead.

The young should show respect to those who are older

The students have great respect for their teachers.

⑷ (for) consideration or care 关心；考虑；顾虑； 重视

The secret police show little respect for human rights.

Electricity is dangerous and should be treated with respect.

⑸ a detail; particular point 细节；方面

In many respects the new version is less good than the old one.

38. Mexico: a country of south-central North America 墨西哥

39. skeleton: the structure formed by all the bones in a human or animal

body（人或动物的）骨骼

a dinosaur skeleton in the Natural History Museum

40. gift

⑴ something which is given willingly; present 礼品；赠品

Christmas gifts

⑵ (for) a natural ability to do something; talent 天赋，天资；才能

He has a gift for poetry.

 a man of many gifts 多才多艺的人

gift of the gab 口才

⑶ v to present with a gift 赠送礼物

41. cycle

⑴ v to ride a bicycle, motorcycle, or similar vehicle 骑车骑自行车等

He usually cycles to school.

Go cycling is a common way of talking about cycling for pleasure.

⑵ n a series of events, etc that happen repeatedly in the same order

循环；周而复始

the cycle of the season

the seemingly endless cycle of violence in this troubled part of the world

⑶ the period of time needed for this to be completed 周时, 周年

the life cycle of insects

⑷ a bicycle, motorcycle, or similar vehicle.

自行车，摩托车自行车，摩托车，或者类似的交通工具

42. fool

⑴ n a person who is lacking in judgment or good sense 蠢人, 傻瓜; 白痴

I'm a fool, I left my coat on the train.

⑵ v to deceive; trick 愚弄；欺骗

He fooled me into giving him money.

You can't fool her; she's much too clever for that.

43. take in (Point 13)

⑴ to receive into one's home; provide lodgings for a person接待;留宿

He had nowhere to sleep so we offered to take him in.

⑵ to include 包含；包括

This is the total cost of the holiday, taking everything in.

When I go to New Year for meetings, I usually take in a movie.

⑶ to understand fully; grasp充分理解；掌握

It took me a long time to take in what you said.

⑷ to deceive 欺骗

Don't be taken in by his promise.

44. invitation: inviting or being invited 请帖；邀请

We had three invitations to parties.

45. occasion

⑴ a particular time when sth happens特殊场合； 特殊时刻

a great occasion 盛大的场面

⑵ the suitable or right time for sth良机；机会

I shall tell her what I think if the occasion arises.

⑶ usage:

① You used occasion when you mean the time is right or suitable for sth.

I saw them at the funeral, but it was not a suitable occasion for discussing holiday plans.

② You use opportunityor chance when you mean that it is possible to

do something.

I was only in Paris for one day and I didn't get the opportunity /

chance to visit the Louvre. (巴黎的)卢佛尔宫

⑷ a special event, ceremony; a happening; an incident重大的事件；事故

II Language Points

1. dress up (Word 1)

⑴ put on one's best or special clothes穿上盛装

All the family members dressed up for the party.

⑵ make sth or sb more attractive, as with clothing装饰;使变得更具魅力

⑶ put on a costume for fun or clothes for a part in a play 化装

Mary was dressed up to play Cinderella in her school play.

You don't need to dress up for this dinner.

I don't want to go to their wedding because I hate dressing up.

⑷ Notes:

① dress up 后接in表示“穿...服装打扮”

I just love the fun of dressing up in ancient clothing.

② dress up 后接as表示“打扮成...”

 The little girl dressed herself up as a angle. (天使)

③ be dress in “穿着...”

She is always dressed in white.

2. celebrate & congratulate

㈠celebrate: do sth special and enjoyable on an important day or because

of an important event 庆祝, 祝贺, 庆贺

The people celebrated the victory.

We celebrated Christmas with a tree and presents.

we had a party to celebrate Mother's silver wedding.

㈡congratulate: to express one's pleasure, praise, or admiration for sb

because of a happy event or sth. successfully done

恭喜；祝贺，向...祝贺

I congratulated my friend on her birthday.

 Let me congratulate you on the birth of your daughter.

We all came up to congratulate on the winner.

I'm writing to congratulate you on your being awarded the first prize in

the contest.

I congratulate you on your great success.

3. would & used to

㈠would

⑴ used as the past form of 'will' when you report what sb says or thinks

They said that they would help us.

⑵ used with 'like' or 'love' as a way of asking or saying what sb wants

Would you like to come with us?

⑶ used for talking about things that often happened in the past 过去常常

 When he was young he would often walk in these woods.

㈡used to

⑴ used to: habits or states that existed in the past but no longer exist

He used to be a teacher in our school.

His father used to play football very well when he was young.

⑵ be (get) used to: in the habit of sth or doing sth习惯于

She is used to the weather here.

He has got used to getting up early.

⑶ be used to do: passive voice

Coal is used to cook our food.

Steel is used to make a lot of things.

4. as well as & as well

㈠ as well as

⑴ equally excellent; no less than同样好

You can't do it as well as I can.

⑵ in addition to; and also; besides和；及； 除...之外

He was my friend as well ;as my doctor.

The book tells about the author's life as well as about his writings.

㈡ as well (as sb or sth): too; also; in conjunction with sb or sth specified;

in addition to sth 还；也；此外还

She knows English and French as well.

When we asked them to stay for the weekend we didn't realise they

would be bringing a couple of dogs as well.

5. as much as

⑴ to the extent, degree, or quantity as 尽多，一样多

Take as much as you like.

⑵ (or so much as) just the same as; almost; practically; really

等于；几乎；实际上；真正地

By running away he as much as admitted that he had taken the money.

⑶ (or much as) even though; although 虽然；尽管

As much as I hate to do it, I must stay home and study tonight.

⑷ as much as, as well as, no more than, no less than, rather than, but,

with , along with, together with, like, besides, except, in addition

to和 “of +名词”等,连接两个并列主语时,动词的单复数和第一个主

语保持一致.

Mary as well as her classmates has learned to drive a tractor.

My classmates as much as I are glad to hear that.

The teacher together with his students is going to visit the Great Wall

I rather than he am to blame.

No one except Xiao Wang and Xiao Li has been to Beijing.

He, like you and me, likes to play football.

The number of the students of our class is 50.

He, no less than you, is worthy of being praised.

His brother, no more than Jim, are to be answered for it.

6. each time & time-clause

⑴each time (every time) 每次

Each time I meet an Englishman, he starts off the conversation with

some comments on the weather.

Every time I travelled by boat, I got seasick.

⑵ by the time 到...时候

He had studied English for three years by the time he came to our

school.

The truck will have arrived by the time you have all the things packed

up.

⑶ the last time 在最后一次

The last time she saw Mr Brown, she was sitting on a sofa.

⑷ the first time 在第一次

The first time he spoke in public, he felt shy.

⑸ the second time 在第二次

The second time (that) we met, he replied to a lot of questions.

⑹ all the time 一直；始终

There were twelve of us, who never took a European meal all the time

we were in China.

⑺ at the time 在...时候

I told you at the time that I thought you were stupid.

⑻ from the time 自从...时候起

From the time the Red Army first came into being, its relationship with

people, in the words of Mao Zedong, was the relationship of fish and

water.

⑼ next time 在下一次...

Next time you come, you will see him.

⑽ the day 在那天

I saw them the day I left for Europe.

⑾ the week (that) 在...那周

We were there the week that it snowed so heavily.

7. Earth Day

Earth Day was first celebrated in 1970 to show international concern

for the environment. It is not, however, an official government holiday

in many countries.

8. Day Off & Day On: 休息日和奋斗日

To have “a day off” means to stay home from work for a day, usually

to relax. A “day on” means that although an American doesn't work that

day, they should do something serious to honour the man for whom the

holiday is given.

9. the living and the dead

某些形容词前加 the 表示一类人，其意义为复数。 如： the poor,

the rich, the old, the young, the sick, the dead, the brave, the deaf and

dumb, the oppressed, the injured, the wounded, the unemployed 等。

The old are taken good care of.

The rich get richer and the poor get poorer in many countries.

10. rather & fairly, quite, pretty, very 表示程度

fairly good = 60 points very good = 100 points

rather (pretty, quite) good = 80 points or so

㈢ Note:

⑴ 只有rather能接比较级和too, 其余三个不能

rather warmer, rather too sure

I can't make a decision now, I need rather more time to think it over.

稍多

⑵quite 和 rather 可用在冠词前，也可和动词连用，其余两个不能

quite a good film, rather a good idea,

Rather the impression I wanted to give you.

I quite like her.

I rather enjoy doing nothing.

⑶ quite, fairly 和 rather也可放在a(n)之后，只有名词前有形容词时，才这

样用

a quite good film, a fairly interesting lecture, a rather good idea

⑷ quite可与绝对形容词连用，其他三个不能

quite right, quite completely, quite perfect, quite absolutely, quite

mistaken, quite round

11. April Fool's Day: April Fool's Day is traditionally a day to play practical

jokes on others, send people on fool's errands, and fool the

unsuspecting. No one knows how this holiday began , it was thought to

have originated in France.

12. play tricks on sb(Word 30)

deceive sb for fun or profit开某人的玩笑；欺骗某人

Tom got very angry when the other boys played a trick on him and hid

his show when he was swimming.

Don't play tricks on me I want to know the truth.

13. take in (Word 43)

⑴ to deceive; cheat; fool 欺骗;愚弄

Don't be taken in by his promise.

Many a person has been taken in by that trick.

⑵ to understand fully; grasp充分理解；掌握

He needs some time to take the situation in.

It took me a long time to take in what you said.

⑶ to receive into one's home; provide lodgings for a person接待;留宿

Now that his parents are dead, who will take athe boy in?

He had nowhere to sleep so we offered to take him in.

⑷to include 包含；包括

This is the total cost of the holiday, taking everything in.

When I go to New Year for meetings, I usually take in a movie.

14. decorate

⑴to add sth in order to make a thing more attractive to look at装饰；点缀

We usually decorate the main streets with flags on holidays.

Decorate the cake with cherries and nuts.

⑵ to put paint and wallpaper onto walls, ceilings and doors in a room or

building 油漆；粉刷

I think it's about time we decorated the living-room.

15. jealous & envy

㈠ jealous

⑴ feeling upset because you think that sb loves another person more than

you 吃醋

Tom seems to be jealous whenever Mary speaks to another boy!

⑵ feeling angry or sad because you want to be like sb else or because

you want what sb else has 嫉妒

He is jealous of their success.

⑶ wanting to keep what one has; envious （常与of连用）妒羡的；羡慕的

She is jealous of our success.

I was jealous of Sarah when she got her new bicycle.

I was very jealous of Sarah's new bicycle.

㈡ envy

⑴ n. (at, of, towards) the feeling you have towards sb. when you wish that

you had their qualities or possession 羡慕; 妒嫉

They are full of green of envy when they saw my new car.

Their beautiful garden is the envy of all the neighbours.

He was filled with envy at my success.

His success is the envy of us all.

⑵ v. feel envy towards sb. because of sth. 羡慕; ；妒嫉

I envy your ability to work so fast.

I don't envy you your journey in this bad weather.

I envy you your health.

I envy him his experience.

They envy him his success.

The award made him envy you and he is no longer your friend.

16. grave & tomb

㈠grave

⑴ the place in the ground where a dead person is buried 坟墓，墓地

He put some flowers on the grave.

⑵ death 死亡

Is there life beyond grave?

㈡ tomb

⑴a place where a body is buried, often one with a large decorated stone

above 坟墓

the Ming Tombs reservoir

⑵a monument commemorating the dead 墓碑

17. lunar calendar & solar calendar

㈠ calendar

⑴ a list that shows the days, weeks and months of a particular year

日历, 月历, 年历

tree ring calendar 年轮历

A calendar is often hung on a wall and may have a separate page for

each month, sometimes with a picture or photograph.

⑵ a system for dividing time into fixed periods and for marking the

beginning and end of a year 历法

the Muslim calendar

From January 1st to February 1st is one calendar month.

⑶ a list of dates and events in a year that are important in a particular

area of activity 全年大事表;一览表；记录表

school calendar, academic calendar 校历

㈡ lunar: of, for, or to the moon; be connected with the moon；

involving, caused by, or affecting the moon 月球的

㈢solar: of or from the sun; relating to, or proceeding from the sun

太阳的

高一英语课件 篇3

1. explain to sb. sth.=explain sth. to sb. 向某人解释某事

5. lie to 位于……

7. on your father’s side 父系的,你父亲的血统

16. have a natural deep harbor 拥有天然的深水港

17. a very beautiful natural landscape 自然风光优美

20. take possession of 拥有……

21. settle mainly on the North Island 主要在北岛定居

23. sign an agreement with 同……达成协议

27. be native to 原产于……

41. attract tourists from all over the world 吸引世界各地的游客

5. use electric pumps in irrigation 使用电泵灌溉

7. increase agricultural production 增加农业产量

8. control…with computers 用计算机控制……..

16. from generation to generation 一代又一代

19. as…as possible 尽可能……

35. the condition of the soil 土壤的条件

41. change into 把…改变为…..

48. be a practical guide to…. 实用的….指南

49. plant wheat close together 密植小麦

13. act the role of 起…….作用,扮演….的角色

21. date back to/from 追溯到---

22. have --- in common 与-有共同之处/共用

23. intend to 打算做……

30. entertain the audience with 用……逗乐观众

33. quarrel over small matters 争论小事

34. be on good terms with 同某人关系好

35. in the other direction 在另一个方向

39. be angry with sb. for sth. 因某事生某人的气

2. express one’s thoughts and opinions 表达某人的思想和意见

4. thanks for 感谢……

5. help sb. with sth. 帮助某人做……

7. communicate with 与……交际 …

8. from culture to culture 从一种文化到另一种文化

10. learn about 打听…

13. be used to do 被用来做……

14. vary from culture to culture 因文化的不同而不同

17. look directly into someone’s eyes 直视

18. rest one’s head on the back of one’s hand 把头靠在手背上

19. get through difficult situations 摆脱困境

26. get into contact with sb. 与某人取得联系

29. lose/break contact with 与……失去联系

32. give sb. a hand--do sb. a favor 帮助

33. manage to do=succeed in doing sth. 努力且成功的做某事

35. carry a very heavy suitcase 提着很重的手提箱

37. vary from culture to culture 文化与文化不同

38. look directly into one’s eyes 直视某人的眼睛

39. make a circle with one’s thumb and index finger拇指与食指做成圆形

41. have opposite meaning 有相反的意思

44. greet with a kiss on the cheek 以轻吻面颊欢迎

45. press one’s palm together 紧紧的握手

46. rest one’s head on the back of one’s hand 把手靠在手背上

47. move the hand in circles over the stomach 用手在肚子上画圈

49. find friends in a world of strangers 在一群陌生人中找到朋友

51. express almost any emotion 表达几乎任何一种感情

53. smile at oneself in the mirror 在镜子中对自己微笑

54. see the smiling face of a good friend 看到好朋友的笑脸

10. become popular around the world 在世界上受欢迎

高一英语课件 篇4

She said, “ They are using PSAs to educate people.”

She said that they were using PSAs to educate people.

“ We must not give up in the face of pressure.” she said.

She encouraged us not to give up in the face of pressure.

Step 2 Direct speech and reported speech (直接引语和间接引语)

He said, ‘I will go to school tomorrow.’

He said that he will go to the school the next day.

She said to me , ‘I am going to London with my father.’

She told me that she was going to London with his father.

She said, “Do you often come here for a visit.”

She asked if I often went there for a visit.

人称变化：

①He said, “I have been to Japan.”

He said that ___ had been to Japan.

②She said, “I'll give you an exam tomorrow.”

She told us that ______ would give ____ an exam tomorrow.

③She asked me, “When do they have their dinner?”

She asked me when _____ had _____ dinner.

She said. ”I have lost a pen.“→

She said. ”We hope so.“ →

She said. ”He will go to see his friend。“→

注意：①The geography teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.”

→

②“I’ll never forget the days in the country.”

③My father said to me, “I read the book in 1986.”

→

④He said to me, “I have taught English since I came here.”

→

代词 this→ 地点状语 here→

状

语 now→ bring→

today→

this week→

yesterday→

last week(month)→

Three day (month) ago→

tomorrow→

next week(month)→

1. ‘I will come and see you again this evening, Tom.’ he said.

2. ‘I will come here again today,’ she said.

The doctor said to the patient, ‘You will have to wait till 3 pm tomorrow.’

1. “I never eat meat.” he said.

He said that ______ never ______ meat.

2. “I’ve found my wallet.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ ______ ______ wallet.

3. “I took it home with me.” she said.

She said that ______ ______ _______ it home with her.

4. The teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and goes down in the west.”

The teacher said that the sun ______ in the east and ______ down in the west.

5. “I met her yesterday.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ met the day ______.

6. “You must come here before five.” he said.

He said that I ______ to go ______ before five.

7. “I bought the house 10 years ago.” he said.

He said that he _______ bought the house 10 years _______.

He said, “I came to see you.”

Tom said, “Do you have any difficulty with English?”

He said, “You are interested in English, aren't you?”

He asked, “Do you speak English or Chinese?”

I asked, “Will you take bus or on foot?”

He said to me，“Where are you from?”

He asked us, “How many factories are there in your country?”

①She said to us, “Please have a break.”

②The teacher said, “Don't smoke in the classroom.”

③The officer said, “Go out!”

She said, “What a lovely day it is.”

1. Our teacher asked us _____ our dictionaries to school.

A. bring B. brought C. bring D. to bring

2. The teacher told the boy students ______ football on the grass.

A. not play B. not to play C. played D. playing

3. Betty asked her sister ____ to the railway station to see her off.

A. not to come B. not to go C. to not come D. to not go

4. The pupil asked his teacher _____ round the earth.

A. whether the moon goes B. that the moon went

C. whether the moon goes D. whether the moon went

5. She asked him ____.

A. whose dictionary this isB. whose dictionary that was

C. whose dictionary is this D. whose dictionary that is

6. Mary’s mother asked her _____.

A. that whether she had finished her homework

B. if she has finished her homework

C. if she had finished her homework

D. that if she had finished her homework

7. Do you know ____?

A. what is he doing B. what he doing

C. what he is doing D. what does he do now

8. I don’t know ____ to learn English.

A. when did he begin B. when he began

C. he when began D. when he begins

9. You can’t imagine ____ when they received these nice Spring Festival presents.

A. how excited they were B. how excited were they

C. how they were excited D. they were how excited

10. Do you remember how many times ____ to Australia?

C. have you beenD. you have been

11. The boss asked his secretary ____ ____he had finished typing the report .

C. whether; or not D. whether; not

12. I wonder how much _____.

A. does he spend on his car B. did he spend on his car

C. he spent on his car D. he spent in his car

高一英语课件 篇5

Subject: English Grade One, Class Six Class Time :Monday, August 23,

Revision(Unit13-17)

------- Focusing on the key phrases and structures

Teaching goals

1. Help students strengthen what they have learnt in the past half term

2. Make them relaxed fully in order that they can deal with the coming exam at their best.

3. Make them have a further understanding about some key structures.

Teaching important points

1.How to motivate our students when they are playing the games

2.How to help them to keep the key phrases and structures by heart efficiently.

Teaching difficult points

1. How to keep the activities well organized and how to clarify some complicated structures.

2. How to give the instructions simply and clearly

Class Type

I am making for a new way to review language knowledge more efficiently

Teaching methods

1. Communicative teaching methods

2. Integrate competitions into the process of reviewing

3. Group work.

4. Induce students to analyze some key structures

5. Strengthen the teaching effects by giving them great encouragement.

Teaching aids

Papers, blackboard, slide projector

Homework

Prepare themselves for the coming examination

Summary after Class

The goals made before class have been reached quite well. The students took part in the games actively. They are quite pleased to accept this way of teaching.. However, the amount of knowledge they have really learnt by heart is a little less than we have anticipated beforehand . So we have to admit the fact that it is rather difficult to combine the communicative teaching ways with the current teaching conditions, in which we have such a large class including fifty-six students or so and the great pressure coming from the miscellaneous examinations.

Teaching procedure

Step 1 A competition for key phrases(10 minutes)

T: Good morning, boys and girls .Have you prepared well for the coming exam? Do you feel a little nervous about that ? Now let’s relax ourselves together. We will have a competition. We have four unknown slides. They are slide A, slide B, slide C, and slide D. Each slide has six phrases in Chinese on itself. In our class we have four groups. Every group can get a slide by drawing lots(抽签).In the end , we will see which group can translate all of these phrases into English correctly., Ok , now every group will send a student out to choose your slide.

Group 4 : (A)junk food, ought to , plenty of , keep up with , make a choice, now and then

Group 1: (B)dress up, in one’s opinion, play a joke on sb., take in, call on, bring back

Group 3: (C)pay off, at most, act out, a great deal of , a number of , pick out

Group 2: (D)around the corner, come to terms with, die down, day and night, take possession of, make up

T: Good job. You have finished it very well except for only one mistake. Group 3 have mixed up two phrases.

We should pay attention to the answer to NO.4 in the slide C, The right answer should be ”a number of”. And the answer to NO.5 in the slide C should be “a great deal of ”. Let’ look at another slide.

T: Group1, Group2, Group4 each have got 10 points. Congratulations! Group 3 has got 5 points. Try harder, guys.

Step 2 Design a form about those modal verbs which are used to express possibility.(18minutes)

T: Our competition will continue. We have learnt that “must , can/could, may/might “can be used to express possibility.

Can you try designing a form to make it clear how to use them in different sentence styles and different tenses. Group members should work together to get the best one in your group. Give you ten minutes to prepare for it.

T: Ok, the time is up. You can’t change it any more. Different groups can exchange your forms, and let’ s compare them with each other. Oh, which do you think is the best one?

Ss: We have agreed on the form made by group 3 .

T: Let’s have a look at it with the projector.

Modal verbs to Tenses

express guess or possibility Present

Or

Future

Present continuous Past

Or

perfect

Positive

sentences must:: very sure, certain

may

might perhaps, maybe

could possible

Modal

verb

+do/be

Modal verb

+be doing

Modal verb

+have done

Negative

sentences Can’t very sure

Couldn’t it is impossible

May not perhaps

Might not not

Question

sentences

Can/could

T: Well done. Your group deserve another ten points and the other three groups each have got five points

Pay attention to two points: (1)“mustn’t” means “You shouldn’t do it”, or “you are forbidden to do something.”. If you want to express you are sure that something is impossible, you should use “ can’t or couldn’t” to say that.(2)Look at the following examples.

a. He must be a student, isn’t he?

b. He must have finished it, hasn’t he?

c. He must have done it yesterday, didn’t he?

If we write the first part of each sentence without “must”, we’ll get three sentences like these.

a’. He is a student b’. He has finished it. c. He did it yesterday.

We got the second part of a, b, c from the sentences a’,b’,c’. Actually, we don’t try to guess any more in the second part of Sentence a, b, c.

Step 3 A game named “single or plural”(15mintues)

T: The following game is still played among groups. The knowledge you will use in this game is Subject-verb agreement.

T:(facing the group 1) Let’ s take Group 1 as an example. I have some phrases for your group members which can be used as subjects. As soon as I tell you one, you should tell me whether its predicate verb is single or plural. I will tell you my phrases one by one and you guys give me your answers one by one. You must do it as quickly as possible because you have only three minutes. Within three minutes, the group who has got the most correct answers is the winner Let’s have a try.

T: physics

S1: single

T: a library together with books

S2: single

T: not only the teacher but also the students

S: plural

… … …

… … …

T: Do you know the rule of the game , S10? Can you tell us something about it?

S10: Yes.I think every student has a chance to take part in the game. It’s very exciting.

T: Quite right. Remember only your first answer makes sense. Anyone can not answer it twice in the same round.

T: When one student is telling his answer, others should keep quiet. Let’ s start our game from group 4.

(maths, the number of students , a number of students, everything, both A and B, half of the food, half of the students, fifty percent of the population, ten pounds, works, every possible means , a clerk and secretary, every boy and every girl, more than one , many a , the pair of glasses, the glasses, bread and butter, the United States, cattle …)

T: Ok, the game is over. Group1 has got 15 points ,.Group 2 has gained 17 points. Group 3 has got 21points. Group 4 has scored 14 points.

Step 4 Summary(1minutes)

Let’s look at our score board

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

30 32 36 29

T: Congratulations. Group 3 win the game at last.

Step 2 Homework(1minutes)

I will assign you nothing for homework. Just remember to prepare yourself for the coming examination. Keep yourself in a high spirit and never forget to relax yourself now and then.

高一英语课件 篇6

提问是阅读教学中使用得最频繁的教法之一。目前语文教学中已形成众多流派,不管哪一派都离不开设计 问题、提出问题、运用问题,开启学生心智,引导学生理解课文。那么究竟应该如何提问呢?本人认为,要研 究阅读教学如何提问,首先要探讨何以要提问。

作为一种教法,提问是师生课堂会话的方式。提问是一种言语行为,属“语用”范畴,提问时使用的问句 属“语形”范畴,而问句中包含的问题属“语义”范畴。

二十世纪科学哲学的一个重要成果,是发现智力活动的起点在发现和提出问题。英国科学家波普尔科学发 现的模式就是:“问题(1 )--假设(猜测)--验证--问题(2)”。因此, 问题也是教师启发学生, 打开思路,开发智力的钥匙。布鲁纳的“发现法”,第一步设卡,即让学生认识上产生矛盾,发现问题;第二 步设法,就是让学生运用已有知识框架或认识结构,在教师点拔下试作解答;第三步验证,如果解答正确,也 即动用旧框架同化了新信息,进一步丰富了已有的框架,如果错了则帮助学生调整或转换旧框架,形成新框架 ;第四步小结,即反馈、总结。认识心理学中的“SQ4R阅读方法”,首先是预习或概观,在此基础上即是“提 问”,然后精读(阅读、思考),最后是复述和复习,以加深记忆;其主要特征就在于提出问题、回答问题, 对教材进行细致、深化的加工。

阅读理解有不同层次。章熊先生分为:(1 )复述性理解(着眼于表层信息,侧重记忆);(2)解释性理 解(通过信息加工, 由表及里、由此及彼,转化为自己的认识);(3 )评价性理解(对文章价值作用评价) ;(4)创造性理解(超越本文,探索新问题,提出新见解)。按章先生的意见,四个层次由低到高排列,而中 学阶段的阅读理解应以一、二两项为本(注:《特级教师--专家学者之选》。)。理解的层次不同,问题的 层面和提问方法也会有所不同。例如,在低年级使用的谈话法适用于复述性理解,提出反常问题,克服学生思 维定势使用于创造性理解。本人认为,狭义的理解应指“解释性理解”,是实现阅读目标的关键,也是阅读智 力活动的核心,想象、欣赏、评价、记忆、创造、应用都以此为基础。

西方解释学是关于文本意义的解释和理解的一种理论与方法或哲学,有助于探讨“解释性理解”的本质。 解释学认为,阅读是读者和本文的对话、交流。伽达默尔说:“使留传下来的本文成为解释的对象,就意味着 它向解释者提出问题,……理解本文也就是理解这个问题”;而“问题的重建变成了我们自己的提问,这种重 建可以把本文意义理解为其回答”,“我们这些努力要求理解的人,必须通过自己让本文讲话”(注:《哲学 译丛》1986年第三期。)。作为接受者总是以提问者身份出现,而作为本文则以对答者身份出现,双方建立起 问答的伙伴关系;而理解就是通过对话、问答而达到“视界融合”的过程。所谓视界是一个从已有知识框架出 发所能理解的可能范围,读者不断从自己已有视界出发,进入本文的视界,形成一个既非自己也非本文的新视 界,具有新的可能性。达到理解的标准就是解释学家所说的“解释学循环”--整体只有通过理解它的部分才 能得到理解,而对部分的理解又只能通过对整体的理解。“解释学循环”有两层意思:

(一)古典解释学认为,作品自身作为整体包括意义、风格、结构等,作品的各部分诸如章节、词句等, 必须放在这个整体中才获得理解与意义;而作品相对于产生它的整个历史文化背景而言,又是这一文化背景的 部分,作品必须放在这一历史文化背景的整体关系中才能得到理解。对这一层次的“解释学循环”,钱钟书先 生表述得最为清楚:“乾嘉‘朴学’教人,必知字之诂,然后识句之意,而后通全篇之义,进而窥全书之指。 虽然,是特一边耳,亦祗初桄耳。复须解全篇之义乃至全书之指(“志”),庶得以定某句之意(“词”), 解全句之意,庶得以定某字之诂(“文”),或并须晓会作者立言之宗尚,当时流行之文风,以及修词异宜之 着述体裁,方概知全篇或全书之指归。积小以明大,而又举大以贯小,推末以至本,而又探本以穷末;交互往 复,庶几乎义解圆足而免于偏枯,所谓‘阐释之循环’者是矣。”(注:钱锺书《管锥篇》第一册,中华书局 出版。)

(二)当代解释学认为,更重要的是解释者的前理解(已有知识框架)形成的视野(整体)与作品(部分 )的关系。读者已有的知识框架是向本文敞开的倾向性,在已有框架引导下进行理解活动,同时也在理解活动 中受到检验、调整、修正,使本文的意义显现出来,因此理解决不是消极地复制本文,而是一种“生产性”、 “构成性”的努力。伽达默尔认为,理解永远是由整体(读者的前理解)运动到部分(作品),又回到整体( 读者所达到的新的理解)的理解。而所有部分与整体的和谐状态便是正确理解的标准。

根据当代认知科学研究成果,阅读理解同时存在两种信息加工方式:资料驱策加工和概念驱策加工(注: J.R.安德森《认知心理学》,吉林教育出版社出版。)。“资料驱策加工”是对来自本文的信息加工,本文从 低到高有如下分析平面:语音平面、书写平面、词汇语义平面、句法平面、语篇平面和语篇所指平面。对本文 各平面从高到低,从低到高的加工相当于“解释学循环”的第一层意思。可是读者的心智并不是一张“白纸” ,本文仅仅是信息的一个来源,其它信息还来源于读者头脑中已有的知识,一个人对有关本文的知识越多,理 解效果越好,就能以最短时间、最少努力,有选择地使用最有成效的线索探索文章语义和句法制约关系,从本 文中构造出意义,这种加工方式称为“概念驱策加工”。读者头脑中已有的知识相当于解释学家说的“前理解 ”,因此这种加工方式也相当于“解释学循环”的第二层意思。任何认识的发生、发展都是认识的外源因素和 认识的内源因素双向作用的结果,阅读也是双向建构,阅读理解要达到两个平衡:作为客观的本文的整体和部 分的协调,作为主体认知框架的平衡。

阅读教学中,教师的主导作用在于通过提问,引导学生达到“解释性理解”,起导读作用。这就要遵循“ 解释学循环”的原则,启发学生同时进行两种方式的信息加工,提高理解水平,培养迁移能力。

以上主要从解释学维度讨论了何以要提问,阅读教学中如何提问就有了根据。

课堂提问的组成是阶梯式的:最高层次是“课”,其次是“课段”,再次是“回合”(一次问和答),最 低层次是“话步”(教师的“问”和学生的“答”)。

我们先讨论“回合”。教师和学生的对话并没有信息沟,教师提问并不是要从学生那里获得信息,而是要 启发学生获得信息或检查学生是否已获得信息。一般会话结构是两话步:一种是A(问)--B(答),A(再问 )--B(再答);一种是A(问)--B(答),B(问)--A(答)。而课堂会话结构是三话步:T(教师问 )--S(学生答)--T(教师评价小结)。第三话步是信息的反馈, 即使有学生能作出正确回答,但不等于 所有学生都能回答,应重复学生的回答以面向全体学生。

由回合到课段,提问有一个开始到结束的框架,每次提问都有一个焦点,如何组织一个课段的提问呢?遵 循“解释学循环”的原则,大致有两种方式。

(一)由浅入深,由表及里。

1、由表层到深层,由具体到抽象。于漪老师《七根火柴》第21 节的提问设计是:(1)无名战士留给人间 的最后话语是什么?(2)无名战士留给人间的最后动作是什么?(这两个是表层问题。)(3 )这些言行显示 了他怎样的心灵、怎样的精神?(4)和一般人相比, 他的伟大之处是什么?(这两个是深层问题。)《截肢 和输血》第1 节提问:(1)白求恩同志是在怎样的气候下赶路的?(冷)(2)作者怎样描写冷?(这两个是 具体的问题)(3)作者着力描写气候寒冷的用意是什么?(这个问题较抽象。)

2、层层深入。如钱梦龙老师《捕蛇者说》第1节的提问:(1 )这种蛇特别,文中用了哪一个字?(“异 ”)(2)“异”在哪里? (归纳为:色、毒、用)(3)作者突出了哪一个?(“毒”)(4)为什么?(陪 衬赋敛之毒)(5)为什么永州人民还“争奔走焉”? (将捕蛇和纳税联在一起)后一问句的焦点以上一问句 提供的新信息为依托,层层递进。

(二)整体--部分--整体。

本人在教《白杨礼赞》第7节的提问设计是:(1)上一节从外形上写白杨树不平凡,本节从哪一方面赞美 白杨树的不平凡呢?(内在气质)(2)作者调动哪些手段赞美白杨树的内在气质?(排比、比喻、拟人、对比 、欲扬先抑)(3)“伟丈夫”和“好女子”对比, 这个“好”是什么含义?(美丽)(4)为什么要用这样的 对比和隐喻? (突出其壮美,并由赞美树过渡到赞美人)(5 )作者用什么手法进而揭示其象征意义?(反问 排比句)(6)这几个排比句之间有什么联系? (由外到内,层层深入)(7)四个反问句句式上有什么变化,

怎样逐步深化点出象征意义?(略)(8)这一节在全文起什么作用? (赞美的高潮所在,精华所在)。

在组织课段提问时,要防止孤立式的提问。一位新教师教读《挖荠菜》第2节提了三个问题:(1)“馋” 是什么意思?(2 )馋到什么程度? (3)饿到什么程度?关键要问:为什么要写馋(突出饿)和写“饿”反 映了什么,才能由表及里。

在课堂上,提问的展示由“回合”到“课段”,再到“课”;可是教师在设计提问时是从“课”到“课段

高一英语课件 篇7

Period 1 Warming up & Listening

Type of lesson: warming up & Listening

Teaching aims：

1. Help the Ss talk about archaeological discoveries and describe the life of people in China during the periods of the Stone Age, the Bronze age, Han Dynasty and Tang Dynasty.

2. By listening to the material on Page 74, students can know what the tool looks like, what its use is and so on and by practice, students can master the ways to get the main idea of the passage and some important or useful details.

Teaching focus: Train Ss’ listening ability.

Teaching aids: tape recorder, worksheet & computer

*********************************************************************

Teaching Procedures:

I. Warming up

Step 1. Ask the students some questions and show them some pictures of archaeological discoveries. Introduce the words “archaeology, archaeologist.”

1) T: China is a country with an ancient civilization. It has a long history and brilliant culture. In which ways can we learn about its history and culture? (Archaeology)

2) What can archaeological discoveries bring us?

Step 2. Present some typical archeological discoveries and lead the Ss to talk about them.

1) T: Please look at the pictures and talk about them.

Questions for thinking:

----What are these important discoveries ?

----What period of time do they belong to?

Step 3. Help the Ss describe the life of people in China during the periods above.

1) T: What can they remind us of ?

Remind us of the history

1.What they ate

2.Where they lived

3.What their houses looked like

4.What kind of tools they used

5.What kind of entertainment they had

……2) Discuss and talk about the following items.

Stone Age Bronze Age Han Dynasty Tang Dynasty

Food

Housing

Home decoration

Tools

Artefacts

Entertainment

Step 4.Help the Ss get to know more important discoveries.

1) Match the time with the place where its relics are unearthed:

Stone Age Mawangdui

Han Dynasty the Banpo Ruins/ the Ruins of Hemudu

Bronze Age the Ruins of the Chang’An City

Tang Dynasty the Ruins of Yanshi Erlitou(1959, Henan)

2) Let the Ss enjoy the pictures and answer the questions.1. Where were they unearthed ?

2. Where can you go if we want to visit them?

II. Listening

Step 1. Pre-listening

1. Show students three pictures. And ask them in which period of time the people in the pictures lived. (Stone Age)

2. Show students some pictures of the tools used by the people in Stone Age. And ask them if they are asked to introduce one of these tools to other people, from which aspects they are going to describe them.

what it looks like

when it was found

where it was found

when it was used

usage

how to use it

…

Step 2 While-listening

1. First listening to get the main idea.

What are they talking about?

A. a short stick.

B. an ancient weapon to throw spears.

C. a little carved animal.

2. Second listening

Task: Listen and write down the questions asked by the students.

1) What ____________________________________________?

2) What ____________________________________________?

3) How ____________________________________________?

4) How ____________________________________________?

5) Where ___________________________________________?

3. Listen to the tape for the third time

Task: Get the answers to each of the questions.

Questions 1: What is it?

☆ Listen and fill in the blanks.

1) It looks like ____________ to me; about ___________.

2) At the top there’s a little ________________________.

3) At the bottom end there are __________ through the stick.

4) On the right there are __________of a young baby goat that is _________.

☆ Make a drawing of the tool.

Question 2: What was it used for?

☆ Listen and fill in the blanks.

1) It is an _____________. One of the __________________.

2) There were bears that ______________________________ and very large kind of _____________________________________________.

3) It was too dangerous to ______________________________ or even _____________.

Question 3: How did it work?

☆ Listen and finish the exercises.

1). How far can you throw a spear with our arm?

A. 15m B. 50m C. 45m

2). How far can you throw a spear with a tool like this?

A. 90m B. 300m C. 60m

3).By using this tool it could be thrown ___________________________________ and with _____________.There are three holes. One __________________________________, one __________________________, and ______________________was tied into the smallest one. A spear of about ________________ was laid on the stick, resting against the small piece of ____________ or leather. With a _________ on the string and a ________________ of the arm, the spear would be thrown.

Question 4:When and Where was it found?

☆ Listen and answer the questions

1) How old is it?

a) 1 to 2,000 years

b) 10 to 20,000 years

c) over 5000years

2) In how many places were this tool found?

Three.

3) How did people in South America and Australia know about this tool?

They invented it again.

Step 3 Post-listening

Task: Write a passage to introduce an ancient tool.

1) Show students a picture of different tools used by people in Bronze Age, and ask them to have a discussion about which one they are interested in.

2) According to the questions and answers in the listening material, students write a short passage to introduce one of the tools in the picture.

3) Present in class.

III. Homework

1) Revise their passage.

2) Preview the reading part of this unit.

Self-evaluation

Unit 20 Reading

Type of lesson: Reading

Teaching aims: Get the Ss to know about the King of Stonehenge

Improve the Ss’ reading ability

Important points: the Ss get a good understanding of the text

Difficult points: Ss’ reading ability get improved

Teaching aids: a tape recorder ,a computer and worksheets

Teaching procedures:

Step I. Pre-reading.（leading-in ）

some pictures about famous tombs in Chinese history

2.When we discover a tomb of a king in China, what can usually be found in it?

( clothing, knife, pottery, jewellery, tools etc. )(leading the Ss know more words about them.)

3.Why were these things buried with the dead king or emperor？

Key：A.To show off their power and wealth.

B. To protect these things.

C. Want the died people to use them after their death.

D. To be given to him for his use in the next life.

F. To show people’s respect to the death.

Step II. While -reading

A. Fast reading to get the main idea of each paragraph, and then divide it into parts

Part 1 (para. 1): The discovery of a grave.

Part 2 (para.2_to 3_): Objects found in the grave.

Part 3 (para. 4_-_5): The importance of the discovery.

Part 4 (para. 6_-7_): About Stonehenge and the King of Stonehenge.

B. Detailed reading:

1. Read the first three paragraphs to find out

1) Which objects were found in the grave of the King of Stonehenge?

Key: a pin, clothing, a coat, a knife, earrings, arrows and a bow tools, weapons, pottery & jewellery

2) Which materials were found?

Key: fur, stone, clay, pottery, copper, bone, and goldRead paragraph 4 & 5 to answer the following question:

1) What are the five reasons to show the importance of the discoveries ?

Key: a) His grave is the richest of any found from that period.

b) This was a time when the first metals were brought to Britain.

c) This man was buried with two gold earrings which are the oldest gold ever found in Britain.

d) He was buried three miles from Stonehenge at the time when the great stones were being brought to Salisbury to build it.

e) He is an example of people who brought culture and new techniques from the European mainland to Britain.

3. Read Part 6&7. do T or F exercises

1) The biggest stones came from a long distance away.

2) Archeologists know how early man was able to construct Stonehenge without the use of modern constructions and machines.

3). The King of Stonehenge was likely to be involved in planning and

helping build the monument.

4). The King of Stonehenge came from Central Europe.

5). At first people thought that it was through was and armed conflict not

through trade and cultural links that the skills to make copper and bronze objects spread to Britain.

( Check the answers: F F T T T)

C. Language points:

1. Buried with him were the tools of a hunter or warrior.

该句为倒装句, 表语置于句首时, 倒装结构为“表语+系动词+主语”。

e.g. Present at the meeting were Professor White, Professor Smith and many other guests.

2. Some of the objects found in the grave give us an idea of how he was dressed when he was buried.

found in the grave是过去分词作定语

give sb. an idea of 使某人明白

e.g. The book will give you an idea of what everyday life of ordinary

Americans is like.

3.That would have made him a man of distinction.

must/may/might+have done (肯定) 对过去事实的推理

e.g. He might have given your more help, they were busy. I can’t find my pen

anywhere. I must have lost it.

can +have done 表示对过去事实疑问和否定的推测

e.g. He can’t have finished the work so soon.

could + have done 意为“过去能够,而事实上却没有”,表示一种遗憾

e.g. He always works hard. He could have passed the exam.

should / ought to +have done 意为“过去应该…但没有…”,有责备对方的意思

e.g. You should have told me the news an hour ago.

shouldn’t / oughtn’t to +have done 意为“过去不应该…，却…”,意在责备对方

e.g. You shouldn’t have told him the news. He was nearly sad to death.

needn’t + have done 意为“过去本没有必要..…却……”

e.g. There was plenty of time, she needn’t have hurried.

might + have done 表示“过去本可以….却没有…”

e.g. They might have given you more help, though they were busy.

Step III. Post reading.

1. From things that were found in the grave, archeologists now believe that people in the Bronze Age in England had trade and cultural links with other parts in Europe. Give examples of such links and what was traded.

country or part of Europe material or object of trade

West Wales stones to build Stonehenge

Spain copper knife

France copper knife

Europe gold jewellery

2. For trade and cultural links as well as life in Britain and the construction of Stonehenge, people in the Bronze Age must have had knowledge about certain things and certain fields of science. Work in groups to talk about the inventions and kinds of science they must have had, based on the reading passage.

activity knowledge, science, inventions and tools needed

1. travel to Scotland roads, shoes, language

nstruction of Stonehenge hammers, ropes, sth. to transport heavy stones, architecture

3. hunting rope, string, bow, arrows, spear, sticks

4. trade with Europe money or goods to trade, boats, bags, maps, language

5. making copper knives fire, chemistry, physics, pots, hammers

Homework:

With the development of modern tourism, more and more culture relics were destroyed by human beings, read the passage below, and think about “what should we do to protect our cultural heritage.”

Saving Stonehenge Oct.22nd,

With almost a million people visiting the monument each year, Stonehenge has become surrounded by roads and parking lots.

Recently, a group archaeologists decided to to restore Stonehenge to its natural setting. One road will be removed, and another will be routed through an underground tunnel. Today’s parking lots will become open fields, and a new visitors’ center will be built four kilometers away.

Unit20. Word Study

Type of lesson: word study

Teaching Contents: spare, average, date, cover, dress, find

Teaching Aims：Help the students grasp the usages and meanings of the above

words or phrases.

Important points: use the above words or phrases correctly and freely

Teaching Procedures:

I. spare

A. Read the following sentences and point out the part of speech of “spare” and the meaning of the underlined part

1. The boy loves surfing the internet in his spare time. (在空闲的时间里)

2. You should carry a spare tire in the back of your car. .( 备用胎)

3. I can’t spare the time for a holiday at present. . (抽出，腾出)

4. Can you spare me just a few minutes? . ( 抽出，腾出 )

5. He doesn’t spare any effort on his studies. .( 不遗余力)

6. Spare the rod and spoil the child. （不打不成器)

B. Summarize the usages and the meaning of “spare”

Spare : Adj. 1.空闲的；2.不用的，闲置的；3.备用的，外加的；

Verb, 1.抽出，拨出，留出；2.不吝惜（时间，金钱）

C. complete the following sentences.

1.What do you usually do _____________________( 在你空余时间)？( in your spare time)

2.You’re driving to Tibet? It’s a long way. Be sure to ________________________ ( 带个备用胎) (bring a spare tire)

3.We can ________________________(给你腾出一间房)（spare one room for you ）

4. He _____________(想尽各种办法)to make her happy.(spares no effort)

II. average

A. present the following sentences.

1. The average of 4, 5 and 9 is 6.平均数

2. Tom’s work at school is above average, while Mary’s is below average. 高于/低于平均

3. The average age of the boys in the class is 17.平均的

4. What is the average temperature in Wuhan in August?

5. If you average 7, 14 and 6, you get 9. 均分

6. On average, there are 20 boys present every day.平均来说

B. Summarize the usages and the meaning of the word “average”

. average adj.平均的

verb .平均，均分。

Noun.平均数，平均值。

C. Complete the following sentences：

1.What is ______________(平均的年龄)the students in your class?

2.平均来说,每年大约有400人死于这种疾病.

On average 400 people die of the disease every year.

3.Temperatures in winter are __________ for the time of year.( 低于平均值) （below average ）

III. date

A. Present the following sentences.

1. What is date today? (日期 )

2. The vase is of an earlier date than that one.（时代）

3. Has the date for the meeting been fixed? （日期）

4. The boy asked her for a date, but was refused. （约会）

5. They’ve been dating for months and know each other better than before. （ 谈恋爱）

6. Don’t forget to date your letter. （注明日期）

7. Young people’s clothes date quickly nowadays, so if you want to be fashionable you have to keep a close eye on fashion.（过时，不流行）.

8. The property of the family dates from the war.（始于，追溯到）

9. The castle dates back to the 15th century. （始于，追溯到）

10. The information is out of date; you need to get the latest news.（过期了）

11. She likes to wear clothes that are up to date（.新式的, 现代的）

B. Ss read the sentences and point out the part of speech of the word

“date” and the meaning of the word and phrases.

date : 1) noun . 日期，时代，约会, 流行.

2）verb. 谈恋爱,注明日期, 过时,不流行. 始于，追溯到

C. Complete the following sentences

1. This kind of clothes is ______________.不流行了( out of date)

2. The church __________________. 始建于13 世纪.( dates back to / dates from the 13 century.)

3. Would you like to ___________ (定个日期开个舞会.)( fix a date for a party.)

IV. cover

A . Present the following sentences.

1. The small town which covers five square miles is famous for its

beautiful scenery. 占地

2. Not having been cleaned for a month, the desk was covered with

dust. 布满

3. Hundreds of reporters were sent to cover the Olympic Games held

in Greece. 采访

4. The noise was so loud that she covered her ears with her hands遮蔽

5. The doctor’s talk covered the complete history of medicine. 涉及

6. I can cover 100 miles before it gets dark. 走一段路

7. Will cover the cost of a new shirt? 够付…钱

8. He always keeps a cover over his car. 覆盖物

9. May I have a look at the book whose cover is blue? 封面

B. Read the sentences above and pay attention to the meaning of the

word “cover”.

Cover : Verb占地,布满,采访, 遮蔽,涉及, 走一段路,够付…钱

noun 覆盖物,封面

C. Complete the following sentences.

1. Do you know _______________________. ( 这个国家占地多少) (how much the country covers )

2. His desk ___________________________ ( 堆满了书). ( is covered with books)

3. Who will be sent to __________________________ ( 采访这次运动会)？ ( cover the sports meeting)

4. His book, _______________________ ( 封面是绿色), was a birthday gift from his mother. ( whose cover is green / the cover of which is green)

V. dress

A. present the following sentences.

1. Jim isn’t old enough to dress himself. ( 穿衣服)

2. How long does it take you to dress yourself? 穿衣

3. He has to dress well in his position. 穿戴

4. She was in special dress for the ceremony. 套装

5. She was wearing a silk dress. 连衣裙

B. Read and observe the sentences and point out how the word dress is used.

C. Present more sentences with similar phrases and tell the differences.

1. He was dressed in white and was easy to be recognized in the crowd.

2. He put on his coat and went to the cinema.

3. The emperor had nothing on when he thought he was in his new clothes.

4. Nobody is allowed to wear a beard in that village.

5. What shall I wear to attend her birthday party?

6. she was all in black.

D. Choose the right phrase to complete the following sentences.

1. She was ___________ the white _______ her mother bought for her yesterday. ( wearing, dress)

2. Don’t forget to _________ your hat, or you’ll get burnt. ( put on)

3. We are going to be late. Please get __________ quickly. ( dressed)

4. The child is too small to _____________ himself. ( dress)

5. Do you think I need to ___________ any jewellery to attend her wedding? ( wear )

6. On Children’s Day, the children _____their best clothes ______. (have…on )

7. The girl _____ red is my former student.( in )

VI. find

A. Present the following sentences.

1. The most amazing find was two gold earrings.

2. The old painting is quite a find.

3. I found a ten-dollar bill on the road.

4. I found him asleep on the sofa.

5. Please find the key for me. = Please find me the key.

6. When a waiter asks a customer, “ How do you find the soup?” He wants to know what the customer thinks of the soup.

7. I find it difficult to understand this film.

8. I was disappointed to find him out.

9. After school I always find him waiting at the school gate.

10. The poor man found his house broken into.

11. You should find out the answer by yourself.

B. Read the sentences, and pay attention to how “find” is used.

C. Complete the following sentences.

1. ______________________________ ( 最有趣的发现) was two dolls lying in the drawer. ( The most interesting find)

2. ____________________________ ( 你觉得这个演讲怎么样？) ( How do you find the speech? )

3. He ___________________________ ( 发现很容易) to get along with his new classmates. ( finds it easy)

4. Whenever he comes back from school, he always _________________________________ ( 发现他的狗坐在门外) waiting for him. ( finds his dog sitting outside)

5. When he woke up the next morning, _________________________________ ( 他发现屋外的世界完全地改变了). ( found the world outside completely changed)

Unit20. Grammar

1. Teaching Goal:

Review the use of “it”. Let students learn how to use “it” by doing some practice in reading, writing and so on.

2. Teaching important points:

The usages of it in different situations.

3. Teaching difficult points:

How to teach the students to master the usages of it

4. Teaching methods:

Observe the materials given to them, generalize from the different examples.

5. Teaching aids:

a projector , a blackboard and paper

6. Teaching procedures:

Step1 Lead in.

Read the following the sentences, and pay your attention to the meaning and the function of “it” in each sentence.

1. It is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing. Textbook (P3)

2. With the right kind of body, it is possible to float around in the ocean. (P20)

3. Isn’t it amazing that a single substance can be so important to our planet and even the whole universe. (P20)

4. It is very relaxing to take a dip in the pool in summer. (P37)

5. It was during the “ Match on Washington DC” in 1963 that he gave the speech “ I have a dream”. (P28)

6. It was also in Atlanta that one of the great leaders of the Civil Rights Movement, Dr Martin Luther King, Jr, was born. (P44)

7. Zhongguanchun made it possible for him to follow his dreams and help the country he loves. (P3)

8. -“Relying on science, technology and knowledge to increase economic power” makes it clear that science and business can and must work together to build the future. (P4)

9. It was through trade and cultural links that European culture and new techniques were brought to Britain.

10. It has been proved that the copper knives came from the places as distance as Spain and western France.

Step 2 Learn the usages of “it” according to the following sentences, dialogues, and exercises.

1. -Where is your car?

-It is in the garage.

(指提到过的或正在谈论的动物或事情)

2. The young couple has a newborn baby. Do you know it is a boy or a girl?

(父母不会用it来指自己的孩子。it可以不区别他们的性别)

3. -It is seven o’clock. There is a knock at the door. Who is it?

-It is the milkman.

4. -Oh, by the way, there was a telephone call for you. Who was it?

-It was my Mum on the phone.

( it可以用来指时间，有人敲门，确认某人为何人，在电话里)

5. It is raining a whole day. It is perfectly cool. It has been a long time since the last rain.

(it可以用来谈论时间，日期，距离，天气等，但要作主语)

6. My grandmother kept telling me that I should help her with housework, but it didn’t help.

(it指前面的整个内容，即：祖母喋喋不休地让我帮助她做些家务)

7. It is no use quarrelling with such a man.

It’s hard for them to answer such difficult questions.

It seems that I have made the same mistake once again.

It is unclear what we should do next week.

It is reported that another big earthquake will happen in the area soon.

It will take you three hours to fly to Hong kong from Beijing.

(it作形式主语)

Exercise:

⑴. Is ______ necessary to finish the composition before May Day.

A. this B. that C. it D. he

⑵. Does ______ matter if I can’t finish the composition before May Day?

A. this B. that C. he D. it

⑶. ______ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.

A. There B. This C. That D. It

⑷. In fact ______ is a hard job for the police to keep order in an football match.

A. this B. that C. there D. it

⑸. It worried her a bit ______ her was turning grey.

A. this B. that C. there D. it

( Keys ⑴ C ⑵ D ⑶ D ⑷ D ⑸ B )

8. He is a heavy smoker. I find it difficult to persuade him to give up smoking.

We soon make it a rule to walk two miles a day.

We take it for granted that water is free at restaurants.

I don’t like it when you shout at your parents.

I don’t feel it my duty to do so.

I hate it when people talk with their mouths full.

(形式宾语)

Exercise:

⑴. They have made ______ a rule ______ in the room.

A. this; not to smoke B. it; smoking

C. it; to not smoke D. it; not to smoke

⑵. I don’t think ______ possible to master a foreign language without much memory work.

A. this B. that C. its D. it

⑶. The chairman thought ______ necessary to invite professor Smith to speak at the meeting.

A. this B. that C. its D. it

⑷. I think ______ to finish the work in such a short time is quite impossible.

A. it B. that C. this D. with

⑸ Don’t ______ that all those who get good grades in the entrance examination will prove to be most successful.

A. take as granted B. take this for granted

C. take that for granted D. take it for granted

(Keys: ⑴ D ⑵ D ⑶ B ⑷ B ⑸D )

9. 1). It was Tom who / that broke the window.

2). It was her whom you should ask.

3). It was because Li Ping was ill that he didn’t come to school last week.

4). It was where you come from that you should return to.

5). It was as you like that you must do everything.

6). It was not until 1920 that regular radio broadcasts began

7). It was in the library that was founded by Mr. Willians

that they finished reading the famous novel.

8). It was neither you nor he that is willing to go the park.

9). It was not only you but also he that is willing to go to the Great Wall.

10). It was his coming that made all of us very happy.

Exercise

⑴ It was the ability to the job ________ matters not where you come from or what you are.

A. one B. that C. what D. it

⑵ I have already forgotten _________ you put the dictionary.

A. that it was where B. where it was that

C. where was it that D. that where was it.

⑶ Was it _________ Sandy’s carelessness _________ your keys were all lost.

A. because; which B. for; what

C. because of; that D. since; why

⑷ It was not long _______ he was born ________ his mother died.

A. before; that B. since; when

C. until; when D. after that

⑸ It was in the factory ________ was owned by Mr. White ______ they learned a lot from the workers.

A. that; where B. which; that

C. what; that D. which; where

⑹ ______ was it in 1979 ______ I graduated from the University.

A. That; that B. It; that

C. That; when D. It; when

⑺ It was not until he finished all his homework _______ to bed last night.

A. did he go B. when he went

C. that he went D. then he went

⑻ ＿＿ Where did you meet Johnson?

＿＿ It was in the hotel ______ he stayed.

A. that B. where C. when D. while

(Keys: ⑴ B ⑵ B ⑶ C ⑷ A ⑸ B ⑹ B ⑺ C ⑻ B

10. 1. It is time for school.

2. It is time to go to school.

3. It is time for us to go to school.

4. It is time that we went to school.

综合练习:

1. It wasn’t until nearly a month later ______ I received the manager’s reply.

A. since B. when C. as D. that

2. Can ______ be in the desk ______ you have put my letter?

A. it; which B. I; where C. you; in which D. it; that

3. - ______ that he managed to get the information?

- Oh, a friend of his helped him.

A. Where was it B. What was it

C. How was it D. Why was it

4. It is what you do rather than what you say ______ matters?

A. that B. what C. which D. this

5. It was some time ______ we realized the true.

A. when B. until C. since D. before

6. It was in the lab ______ was taken charge of by professor Zhang ______ they did the experiment.

A. when; that B. which; where C. that; where D. which; that

7. I like ______ in the autumn when the weather is clear and bright.

A. this B. that C. it D. one

8. - He was nearly drowned once.

- when was ______?

- ______ was in when he was in middle school.

A. that; It B. this; This C. this; It D. that; This

(Keys: 1 D 2 D 3 C 4 A 5 D 6 D 7 C 8 A

Unit20. Integrating skills

Roots of Chinese Culture

Teaching aims:

1. Help the students get the general idea of the text.

2. Help students know the importance of the relics and have correct sense to protect them.

3. Teach the students how to create a flow chart.

Teaching procedures:

VII. Step1. Lead-in

Show students some pictures of unearthed objects in Snxingdui, and ask them questions such as: Have you seen the pictures? What do you think of them? When and where were they found?

VIII. Step2. Fast reading

Ask the students to read the text quickly and them summarize the main idea of the text.

Paragraph1. The discovery of Jinsha Relics.

Paragraph2. The similarities between Jinsha Relics and Sanxingdui Relics.

Paragraph3. The importance of the discovery of Jinsha Ruins Relics.

Paragraph4.The discovery of Sanxingdui Relics.

Paragraph5. The importance of the discovery of Sanxingdui Relics.

Step3. Careful reading

1. Ask the students to listen and read paragraph by paragraph and then do the exercises.

Paragraph1.

1. What kind of special relics were unearthed in Jinsha Ruins?

2. Why could they take the archaeologists’ attention?

Because the ivory and animal bones found in Jinsha Village are important ,they will serve as important materials for the study of local geography, climate and the environment in ancient times.

3. Who was the first to discover the Jinsha Ruins and when?

Construction workers from a local company found ivory and jade in the mud when they were building road there on February 8, .

Paragraph2.

Why is cong special?

Because it was not made in Sichuan, but was transported there, which proved that Sichuan had trade links with the Yangtze and Yellow River valleys at that time.

Paragraph3.

What is the significance of the discoveries in Jinsha Village?

The discoveries there proves that the history of Sichuan is much longer than 2300 years.

Paragraph4.

True or false:

1. Sanxingdui Ruins were first discovered by farmers.

2. The farmers hesitated about whether to give the relics to the state.

3.The local teachers and officials persuaded them to turn in the relics.

Paragraph5.

1. Since 1920, what have been unearthed in Sanxingdui Ruins Site?

More than 10,000 relics dating back to between 5000 BC and 3000 BC have been discovered. 53 holes were dug up and over 1,200 pieces, including bronze and gold masks, bronze objects and images, jade and ivory had been found.

2. What do archaeologists hope to discover in the future?

They hope to discover some of the mysterious palaces, tombs of kings and bronze and jade workshops.

True or false:

1. From 1929 to 1986, 53 holes were dug and over 1200 pieces of objects were found.

2. Today, the work in Sanxingdui has already been done.

2. Then let students to fill in the blanks.

What’s the link between Jinsha Ruins and Sanxingdui Ruins?

Civilizations Jinsha Ruins Sanxingdui Ruins

time

Who found it

Objects found

3. Reading comprehension.

1. The passage suggests that ______.

A. Jinshan Relics and Sanxingdui Relics were found by chance

B. archaeologists knew there were a lot of treasures there long ago

C. Yan Kaizong is not a patriot.

D. archeologists will never find another relics again.

2. Which of the following statements is right according to the text?

A. Jinsha had no trade links with other areas.

B. The ivory and animal bones found at Jinsha are of no real value.

C. Sichuan has a history of more than 2300 years.

D. Many of the relics at Jinsha have no connection with those found at Sanxingdui.

3. At Jinsha Relics, archaeologists found_________.

A. gold and jade

B. bronze and stone objects

C. many ivories

D. all of the above

4. Archaeologists are scientists who_______.

A.study nature

B. do research on animals

C. study the buried remains of ancient times

D. give instructions to students

5. We can infer from the passage that ________.

A. China has a long history with a rich culture

B. Yan Kaizong kept the relics found by his grandfather as his own

C. since 1986, archaeologists have stopped digging at Jinsha Relics

D. Sanxingdui Relics was first discovered by archaeologist

Keys: A C D C A

IX. Step4. Discussion

1. Why do you think the text is titled with “Roots of Chinese Culture” instead of “Sanxingdui Ruins”?

2. Do you think Yan Kaizong was foolish? Why?

X. Step5. Writing

1. After construction workers found ivory and jade in the mud when they were building roads there, what steps and decisions did they take? Then the teacher lists the all the steps and decisions on the blackboard.

2. Ask the students to decide in which order steps and decisions were taken.

3. Ask the students to create different shapes for different types for action, for example: triangles for decisions, circles for the discoveries, boxes for things that are going on and diamonds when calling in other people.

4. Then ask the students to draw the arrows to show the direction of the flow.

5. Ask the students to check for missing steps.

6. Just now we have made a poster showing a flow chart of “Jinsha Village”, can you make a poster showing a flow chart of “something has been stolen”? Please make it yourselves.

7. Please check your answer with the chart on page 80.

8. Ask the students to make a poster showing a flow chart of the things you should do when you have discovered some old things in the ground.

Example:

高一英语课件 篇8

Period 1

(一)明确目标

1. To make the students creative and thinkable

2. Describe things and how they work.

(二)整体感知

Step1 presentation

Every day, we see and get in touch with a lot of things. But have you ever made any sense of how these things work and how many ways they can be used in our every life?

Fox example: a piece of chalk

Excellent, now we’ll see what our text wants us to say on page 57.

(三)教学过程

Step2 speaking

Next I’ll show you something for you to think over to see how many ways you can think of them which are used in our life.

The teacher shows practicalities on the screen using the projector, such as a toothpick, a sock and a plastic bag etc. show the students as many others as you would like.

Ask the students to say as many as they can. And collect those key works from the students on the blackboard.

Step3 talk box

Here on the screen you can see a talk box with some letters in. you are wanted to make as many words as you can by moving the sides of the box. And you can move any side as many steps as you wish.

For example :(to show them the way of moving the sides of the first and last to form the word “stop”.

Suggested answer stop, step, item, door date, room

(四)总结,扩张

Step 4 true or false

Show these three questions on the screen or just ask the students to turn to this page to read them.

Ask the students to get their answers by discussing them in pairs or groups of 4…

(1) The word “boat” can be spelled using four of the letters from the word “automobile” (true)

(2) 11 minutes past 5 o’clock, is 48 minutes before 6 o’clock. (False)

(3) If you turn a left-handed glove inside out it will fit on a fight hand. (It depends on what kind of gloves you are having. If it is a thread glove, it is true. It is a leather one, it is false.)

Step5 practice

Speak about the use of the following things. You may find the pictures of these practicalities and show them to the students on the screen.

A. a pencil B. a schoolbag C. an empty bottle D. a computer E. a desk

(五)随堂练习

Read the following passage and answer the question after discussing them in pairs

Disk Doctor

What can you if you lose the data from your disks? To find an expert, who would recover the lost information for you, is the easiest solution. Jack Olson is one of these experts, jack and a few of his friends set up a company called “jack’s disk doctor service” in 1984.They work from home and give all the money they earn to charity. The fees are always the same, no matter how precious the data on the disk is. Some people, however, are so grateful that they send extra money to jack or the charities his company supports. The fees are always the same, no matter how precious the data on the disk is. Some people, however, are so grateful that sent extra money to jack or to the charities his company supports, one oil company offered him ,000 for his help and an architect even sent him a blank check.

It would be difficult to put a value on the things rescued by the Disk Doctor. There have been disks containing medical research, television scripts, manuscripts of whole books, a lawyer’s papers for a court case and even Margaret Thatcher’s travel plan for a visit to eastern Europe. For this last case, jack had to go in person to Thatcher’s office “for security reasons”.

Disk is usually sent to the disk doctor by post, but some times people are in such a hurry that they can’t wait for the mail to come. For example, some radio scripts had to be rushed by taxi to jack’s house because they were needed for broadcasting the next day. When the material has been recovered, the disk is returned to the sender with a diagnosis and a prescription for avoiding the problem in the future, One grateful client, an author, put a “Thank you” to jack in the front of his book saved me from a heart attack,” he wrote.” but,”says jack “most people don’t take any notice of the doctor’s advice”

1. Why did the architect sent jack a blank check?

A. the architect did not have any money.

B. the architect did it for security reasons

C. the architect always followed the doctor’s advice

D. the architect thought jack’s service was priceless.

2. Which of the following statements is not true?

A. jack’s disk doctor service has only one standard fee.

B. jack and his company have made a fortune for their service.

C. Margaret Thatcher is a very important person.

D. jack’s clients are from all talks of life .

3. From the statement “but …most people don’t take any notice of the doctor’s advice”. We can infer that ____

A. most people don’t take medicine regularly

B. many of jack’s patients would probably get sick again

C. many of jack’s clients have sought for his help more than once

D. most people don’t read the instruction when using a computer

Suggested answer 1.D2.B3.C

Step6 homework

Finish off the exercises in the workbook

Period2

(一)明确目标

To learn the listening and speaking of the text.

To learn how to give advice and make suggestions.

(二)整体感知

Step1 presentation

Hi class. Yesterday we talked something about everyday little things. Now I’d like you to listen to some descriptions of other little things we use in our everyday life. Listen to them carefully and then tell me they are about.

(三)教学过程

Step2 listening

Now it’s your turn .think about the objects we use in our every day life. Describe two or three of the objects to your classmate and see if he she can guess what you are describing. Don’t make it too easy to guess. These questions can help you with your descriptions.

Show the students those suggested sentences on the screen. Ask the students to work in pairs.

(四)总结,扩展

Step3 speaking

Jane wants to buy a cell phone (mobile phone. Canadians use it mostly.) Please give your advice or suggestions about the idea as the different poles (Jane ,Jane’s best friend, Jane’s mother and Jane’s father ) suggested in the textbook. Ask them to work in groups of four. They check the answers they get for each pole they play.

Show the students the oral English about advice and suggestions in the screen.

You’d better (not ) do…

You should /ought to do ….

You need (to)…

I suggested that…

What /how you ….?

Why not …?

Why don’t you …?

Step4 practice

Work in groups of four. Decide which role each group member should play and then take a few minutes to prepare the role cards. Report your decision to the class when you have finished the decision.

Suggested answer

There are no stable answers. Encourage the students to say as much as possible.

Step5 practice

Talk in groups of 4 about the ideas for gifts for grandfather, then ask two pairs to act out their dialogue in the front.

Gifts for grandfather

Hello. My grandfather in turning 70shortly, having a big party etc. I’d like to give him something special somehow related to his granddaughter (that is me ) who is 16yesrs old .Does any one have any great ideas? Some ideas I have …a garden stone with her hand and foot prints: a pillow with her picture on it …stuff like that. Thanks…

Step6 home work

1.开放作文

2. Finish off the exercises in the workbook.

Period3

（一）明确目标

To understand the passage and finish those post-reading questions

To learn the grammer…present continuous passive voice.

（二）整体感知

Step1 presentation

Hello class, how you keep in touch with your parents or good friends.

Quite good. Telephones make our life so convenient. Mostly you keep in touch with others by phone. Can you imagine the days without telephones now?

Have you ever used a cell phone? Do any of your classmates have cell phones?

（三）教学过程

Step2 pre-reading

You did quite well now. next I want you have a discussion about the following questions in groups of four.

(1) How is the way we live today different from life in the pas?

(2) How have inventions and new technology changed our way of life .(show them the following words on the blackboard or on the screen to help the students to go on with their discussion if possible.)

Post house postcard, telephone, cell phone, cell phone

(3) why the things like cell phones, computers and TV so popular?

Step3 reading

Read the text as fast as possible, then say ture or false to the follow sentences.

⑴Wang mei will be back home 10 minutes later.

⑵We may talk to any one who also has a cell phone in his pocket.

⑶Now cell phones can be used as cameras, but not to sent email or stuff the internet.

⑷Some important days can be reminded about by the earliest cell phones.

⑸Some students disobey the rules and using their phones in the classroom.

⑹John’s parents gave him a cell phone as a Christmas gift, but don’t let him use it in school.

⑺Wang mei calls her best friends at least once a day.

Suggest answer

TTFFFFT

Step4 listening

Listen to the text and then answer the following questions.

(1) What does the title “life on the go” mean?

(2) Why do some schools not let students use cell phones? Do you agree?

(3) Why do teenagers like cell phones so much?

(4) wang mei says that cell phones are the most useful invention ever. Do you agree? Which invention do you think is the useful? Why?

Suggested answer:

⑴a busy life.

⑵If a phone starts ringing in the classroom, teachers and students are disturbed and cannot work.

⑶We have a need to stay in touch with friends and family no matter where we are or what we are doing. Having a cell phones also makes us feel safer, since we can call for help in case of an emergency. It is cool and a way to fun, too.

Step5 further reading

Reading the second paragraph of the text and tell us the general meaning of it.

(The factions of the modern cell phones, / cell phones can be used for many things.)

Step6 practice

Post-reading

Look at the outline and fill in the banks. Finally check the answer individually.

(1)略

(2) Cell phone can be used for many things.

Cell phones male it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere words and images are sent throughout the world. The latest cell phones have features such as games, music and electronic calendar that will remind you about appointments and important dates.

(3) Problems

A. In schools: if a phone starts ringing in the classroom, teachers and students are disturbed and cannot work..

B. At home: parents worry that their children will spend too much time and money on phone calls.

(4) Reasons:

A. We have a need t stay in touch with friends and family no matter where we are or what we are doing.

B. Having a cell phone also makes us feel safer, since we can call for help in case of an emergency.

C. The cell phone is not only a useful too but also a way to have fun and be cool.

(5) Wang Mei’s explanation.

(四)总结,扩展

step7 think and act

Design you favorite cell phones.

Read the request loudly to the students to make sure what they are wanted to do. Ask the students to work in pair or groups of four. Several minutes later, ask them to show their designs and make some necessary explanations.

Step8 language study

Word study. Match the words and phrases on the left with their meaning on the right.

Step9 grammar

(1) The present continuous passive voice

现在进行时的被动语态: be + being + done,表示某件事情正在被进行之中, 如:

This question is being discussed at the meeting.

The children are being taken care of by the aunt.

(2) Practice

Do the exercise in part 1& 2 on page 61.

Suggested answer

Part1

(1)Money is being collected for the broadband project.

⑵A report about the negative effects of cell phones is being written I school.

⑶A computer center is being built for the students

⑷Their test-tube baby is being taken good care of by the parents.

⑸Human cloning is being studied by some scientists.

⑹The laws are being revised to protect the fights of women and children.

Part2

⑴How much money is being spent a month on their cell phones?

⑵What is /are being produced by this factory?

⑶Who is being interviewed for the job?

⑷What are being sent to his friend’s phone?

⑸What are being developed for the human resource department of their company?

（五)随堂练习

Step10 discussing questions about the safety of using a cell phone.

(1) What about children using wireless phones?

(2) Do hands-free kits for wireless phones reduce risks from exposure to RF emissions?

(3) Do wireless phone accessories that claim to shield the head from RF radiation work?

Period4

(一)明确目标

Put much stress on the writing after reading the passage.

Ask the students to write a short passage to AXL as the text demands us to do.

(二)整体感知

Step1 lead in

Have you thought of anything about the future of the earth?

What will the man’s future be like?

What is the most thing that man worries about the developing computers? What is your idea about it?

(三教学过程

Step2 read the text quietly and answer the following questions.

(1) Who ruled the earth in the year 2374?

(2) What is the leader of the humans decided to do ?

(3) Do you think that humans and machines can live peacefully together in the future?

Suggested answer

(1) The earth is ruled by a great computer named AXL.

(2) The leader of the humans has decided to do something to stop AXL, bring the machines and people back together, and make the world beautiful again.

Step3 listen to the passage .then try to fill in the following blanks.

But there is ____ hope. The human beings have been able to keep a small, secret school ___ since the machines took_____. In this school, the students still learn____ all the wonders of the world-science art history .culture and they are still allowed to dream about a ___ future. The leader of the humans has decided that it is time to do something to stop AXL, bring the machines and people___ together, and make the world ____ again. A group of experts were asked to solve the problem, but they failed. Now, the leader has asked a group of students to do what they can) ____ save the earth.

Suggested answer still open over about better back beautiful to

Step4 discussion

Discuss the following topic in group of 4first, and then ask someone individually to report what they discussed in class.

(1) How do you think of the love and friends in the world?

Have you ever experienced such love and friendship?

Would you tell us your story?

Step5 writing

Write a letter to AXL on the following points:

Tell AXL who you are and why you are writing this letter

Tell AXL about love and friendship

---Explain how love and friendship will make the world better.

---Give examples of how love and friendship will make the world better.

Step7 home work

Finish off the exercises in the workbook.

高一英语课件 篇9

Teaching aims & demands:

To develop students’ ability of reading a play

To know about American family life and problems that happen between American teenagers and their parents

To form a positive attitude towards solving problems between teenagers and parents

Teaching procedures:

(1). a dirty or untidy state _______

(2). give a reason for something _______

(3). believe that somebody is good_______

(4). something worthless or of low quality_______

(5). a person between a child and a grown-up _______

(7). without being punished_______

Talk about the four pictures on P21

List some problems with parents.

①____________ ②_____________ ③_____________

(2) How to solve these problems.

①____________ ②_____________ ③_____________

Please go through the Reading strategy and tell how to read a play.

1.It is often in the form of ___ _________.

2.It usually includes_________ ______, and each act can have_________ _______.

3.The words or speeches in a play are very________, and some of the words in a sentence are______ _____.

4.There are some helpful _____________in a play.

5.It should be_____ ________.

Get students to read the play and finish Part A individually.

How many acts are there in this play? And how many scenes in each act?

1. Listening and complete C1 on P24.

2. Please read Act One of the play carefully and fill in the form

Characters Things they do Feelings

2. Please read Act Two carefully and fill in form:

Characters Things they do Feelings

1. This passage is mainly about ________.

A. what Mom and Dad did after they returned from vacation.

B. what Daniel and Eric did at home.

C. the reason why the dog was tired and hungry

D. a big quarrel that an American family had

2. Mom and Dad left Daniel in charge at home because ______.

A. he was an adult B. he was the youngest

D. they thought he could take good care of everything while they were away.

3. Which is NOT true according to the passage?

A. The children were very excited when their parents came back a day earlier than expected.

B. The children didn’t use the money for themselves.

C. Daniel was left in charge at home while their parents were away.

D. Eric wanted to tell his parents what had happened, but Daniel said they didn’t need to.

4. The main reason for their quarrel is that ______.

A. Daniel was too rude.

B. Eric didn’t tell his parents what had happened

C. the parents blamed Daniel without giving him a chance to explain

D. Daniel and Eric didn’t behave well at home.

Fill the missing words in the blanks to complete the summary of the play.

Mom and Dad arrived back from v_______ earlier than e_______ in order to give the boys a s_______. They got so a____. When they saw the house was in a m___ that Dad shouted at D____, the elder brother, who was in c______ of the house when they were away. Daniel s_______ the door to show his anger, because their parents never gave him a c_____ to explain. E___, the younger brother, wanted to explain to his parents what had h_______, but Daniel didn't think that their parents d______ to know the truth.

At the end of the play, both Mom and Dad thought maybe they were too h___on the boys. However, Dad decided to p_____ Daniel for his rudeness so that he would show r_____ for his parents in future.

1. If you were Eric or Daniel ,what will you do?

2. Find some adj. to describe good parents in your eyes.

They should be__________, __________, __________,__________...

3. How do you deal with the relationship between you and your parents?

We should _______, ________, _______, ________...our parents.

3. The word “family” means “f_______ a_____ m______ I l_____ y_____”.

1. Role-play the dialogue in groups of five.

(Divide students into groups of five and one is the narrator and the others are the main characters. Role-play Act One and Act Two.)

There are three kinds of goals: short-term, medium-range and long-term goals.

Short-term goals are those that usually deal with current (当前的)activities, which we can apply on a daily basis. Such goals can be achieved in a week or less, or two weeks, or possibly months. It should be remembered that just as a building is no stronger than its foundation, our long-term goals cannot amount to very much without the achievement of solid short-term goals. Upon completing our short-term goals, we should date the occasion and then add new short-term goals that will build on those that have been completed.

The intermediate goals build on the foundation of the short-term goals. They might deal with just one term of school or the entire school year, or they could even extend for several years. Any time you move a step at a time, you should never allow yourself to become discouraged or overwhelmed. As you complete each step, you will enforce the belief in your ability to grow and succeed. And as your list of completion dates grow, your motivation （动力）and desire（欲望） will increase.

Long-term goals may be related to our dreams of the future. They might cover five years or more. Life is not a static thing. We should never allow a long-term goal to limit（限制） us or our course of action.

1. Our long-term goals mean a lot ________.

A. if we cannot reach solid short-term goals

B. if we complete the short-term goals。

C. if we have dreams of the future

2. New short-term goals are built upon________.

A. a daily basis B. your achievement in a week

C. current activities D. the goals that have been completed

3. When we complete each step of our goals, _____________.

A. we will win final success B. we are overwhelmed

C. we should build up confidence of success

D. we should have strong desire for setting new goals

4. What is the main idea of this passage? _____________

A. Life is dynamic thing. B. We should set up long-term goals.

C. Different kinds of goals in life. D. The limitation of long-term goals.

5. Which of the following statements is wrong according to the passage? _____________

A. The long-term goals cannot amount to very much without the achievement of solid short-term goals.

B. The intermediate goals build on the foundation of the short-term goals.

C. Life is a static thing, thus we should never allow a long-term goal to limit us or our course of action.

D. We should often add new short-term goals to those which have been completed.

高一英语课件 篇10

I. Teaching aims and demands学习目标和要求：

ic话题:

1>Talk about science and technology

2>Describe things and how they work

3>Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

4>Talk about new inventions

ction功能:

Agreement and disagreement 同意和不同意:

Absolutely. I disagree. / Well, yes, but …

That’s exactly what I was thinking. I’m afraid I don’t agree.

That’s a good point. You can’t be serious.

That’s just how I see it. Well, it depends. That’s worth thinking about.

I would have to disagree with that. Well, I’m not so sure about that.

3.vocabulary词汇:

toothpick, agreement, disagreement, disagree, absolutely, depend, press, teenager, throughout, add, latest, calendar, remind, appointment, behaviour, obey, dare, emergency, whatever, dial, according, unexpected, particular, negative, clone, interview, department, electricity, planet, wonder, defeat, force, peaceful, succeed, skip

stay in touch with, call for, in case (of…), according to, take over, break down

4.grammar语法:

The Present Continuous Passive Voice (3) 被动语态:

1>用英语描述事物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

New functions are being added to the phones.

Michael is being interviewed for the job.

Modern cellphones are being used as camera and radios.

2>用英语描述人物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

The new student is being introduced to the class.

Look! The children are being led into the garden.

5.language usage语言运用

运用所学语言，围绕新科技、新技术和新发明这一话题，完成教材和练习册中的听、说、写的任务；阅读课文 “Life on the go” 并联系生活中的实际，书写一篇目短文。

II. Difficult points 难点

III. Main teaching aids教具: A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards

Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法:

1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.

2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the 限listening material.

3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class

Ⅴ. Periods: 7-8 periods.

Ⅵ. Teaching procedures 教学过程

Period 1

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

Talk about the teaching plan for this unit and at the same time tell the students the teaching aims and demands. During this period, do WARMING-UP, LISTENING, SPEAKING.

2. WARMING-UP

Introduction This activity provides a good opportunity to talk about creativity and to practise problem-solving skills.

Instruction When the students have solved the problems, ask them how they did it and compare different solutions. Ask the students what creativity is and if it is possible to learn how to be creative.

Answers:

Useful Things Various answers are possible. Encourage the students to think of as many uses as possible. It is not important if the new use is useful in the conventional sense, the emphasis here is on having students explain why / how it will be useful.

Talk box Various combinations are possible. Examples: 1st row left to right: stop, side, soot, stem. 2nd row left to right: coat, code, cram. 3rd row left to right: aide, atom. 4th row left to right: pram, poor. Students can also go right to left and diagonally - the more ways the better. Again, the emphasis is on having students explain their choices and solutions. The activity is not about getting the “right” answer.

True or False Answers: T-F-T. Ask the students how they came up with the answer and encourage them to think of more true or false questions.

Extension Ask the students to come up with more creativity tests.

3. LISTENING

Introduction The students will hear descriptions of everyday objects and are asked to try to guess what is being described. The exercise will be more useful and interesting if you encourage the students to move beyond the obvious uses of the objects described.

Instruction Tell the students to listen to the tape and try to guess what is being described. Before they listen to the tape, you can ask them to describe an everyday object (or you can bring two or three objects and describe them). When the students have listened to the tape and guessed what's being described, they can work in pairs or groups to discuss how the objects can be used. Encourage the students to think of new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses.

Extension Ask the students to think about other objects that either fit the description or can be used for the same things.

LISTENING TEXT:

1 These are very simple. Two sticks, about 20 centimetres long. They are usually made of wood. You hold the two sticks in one hand. You put one stick between two of your fingers, and you hold the other one with your thumb. These things can be difficult to use at first, but you will soon learn how to pick up even small pieces of food.

2 This thing is very popular and useful. Almost everyone has one these days. You can see people using this thing on the bus, when they are walking, or at home. It is usually small, about the same size as your hand, and it comes in many colours. There are several buttons on it, some for numbers, others for other things. It can be put in your pocket or in a small bag. With it, you can talk to people far away.

3 This is a large box with a big door. If you open the door, a light comes on and you can see what's inside. You'd better not leave the door open for too long, because it is not good for the things inside. You might catch a cold, too, if you stand in front of the open door. There are several shelves inside, some in the box itself, some in the door. You usually find this large box. in the kitchen.

Answers to Exercise 1:

Object described Possible uses

I Chopsticks Eating, opening a bottle. Students can think of more creative uses.

2 Cellphone Making phone calls, sending pictures, sending e-mails. Students think of more.

3 Refrigerator Keeping food fresh, keeping drinks cool. Students think of more.

Answers to Exercise 2:

Various answers are possible.

4. SPEAKING

Introduction This group discussion is an opportunity for the students to practise their ability to express, support, and challenge an opinion. Jane wants to buy a cellphone, but before she buys one she wants to know what her parents and her friend think. The students will role-play the discussion.

Instruction Divide the students into groups and explain that they are going to prepare a role play and have a discussion. Each group member will play one of the roles and must prepare a role card. If necessary, you can use one of the role cards as an example. Explain the “rules” of the discussion to the students and remind them of the basic classroom rules.

1 Decide who will play which role. The student who plays Jane will be the group leader.

2 Give the group enough time to prepare the role cards.

3 Check that all group members are ready. Before the students begin the discussion, remind them that Jane should open the discussion and that they should take turns introducing themselves and stating their opinion as outlined in 4 and 5.

4 Jane opens the meeting by welcoming everybody. She also explains why they are meeting and asks everyone to help her make her decision.

5 Each group member introduces himself / herself and states his or her opinion and reasons.

6 When all the group members have introduced themselves and stated their opinions and reasons, the students can continue the discussion as they see fit. They can ask questions, give more examples and reasons, explain their opinions, and debate and challenge other views.

7 Remind the students that each group member must try to make the others agree with him or her.

Possible answers:

Jane

1 I can use a cellpho_e to call my parents if I am late.

2 I can use a cellphone to call for help.

3 I can use a cellphone to stay in touch with my friends. Jane's best friend

1 we don't really need cellphones.

2 we are not allowed to use cellphones in school.

3 it is better to use the money for something more important.

Jane's mother

1 cellphones are too expensive.

2 Jane should not spend too much time on the phone.

3 Jane is too young to have a cellphone. Jane's father

1 if Jane has a cellphone, I can always find out where she is.

2 a cellphone will help Jane feel safe.

3 Jane can use a cellphone send messages to her friends.

Sample discussion:

JANE: Thank you for taking the time to talk with me. Mum, Dad, you know I have told you before that I want to buy a cellphone. I would like to tell you why I want to buy one, and I would like your advice.

DAD: OK, why don't you start and then we will all tell you what we think.

JANE: Thanks, Dad. I think a cellphone is very useful, because I can use it to let you know where I am and when I will be back home. For example, if I have to stay late at school, you might get worried and wonder where I am. If I have a cellphone, I can call you and tell you that I will be late. .

MUM: Well, that's true, but I don't think you should buy a cellphone. In my opinion, a cellphone is too expensive. Besides, if you have a cellphone I think you will spend too much time talking on the phone. You'd better use your time to study instead.

CINDY: I agree with Mrs Collins. Some of the other students in our class have cellphones and they talk on the phone all the time. I don't see how they ever have time for anything else. And it is expensive. One of my classmates said that she spent 110 yuan in one month!

DAD: Jane, I think you are right. I often worry about where you are and I never know when I will be home from work. I remember last year, when you were at the supermarket and I had promised to pick you up. I was late and couldn't find you when I got there. If you have a cellphone I can just call you.

JANE: Thank you for telling me what you think. I will take some time to think about what you have said. Now let's have some fun. How about playing some cards!

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Preview the reading text

2. Learn the new words and expressions by heart.

3. Get ready to be examined in the speaking activities.

Period 2

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the speaking activities.

2. During this period, do some reading.

2. PRE-READING

Introduction The questions are designed to get the students to think about the cellphone as an example of inventions that have changed our way of life.

Instruction Encourage answers and comments that help students think about the way technology affects our life and thinking. The second question will help: students are likely to mention what we do today and compare to what people did in the past. Big inventions would include cars, computers, electricity, etc. The third question will help the students reflect on why some inventions are more popular than others.

Extension Ask the students to think about what “big” inventions have in common. Encourage students to think more about question 3. What are the consequences of “popular” science - will it lead science in the wrong direction?

3. READING

LIFE ON THE GO

Introduction The reading discusses the increasing popularity of cellphones in Chinese society. Cellphones are everywhere and have positive and negative effects on our life. Encourage the students to take a critical view of the cellphone culture, or life on the go, and think about how trends and life-styles are related to science and technology. Note that Wang Mei (the girl in the text) says that cellphones are useful and repeats the reasons we encounter in ads and the media - but in the last paragraph we also learn that she (like most people) actually uses the cellphone for other, perhaps less grand purposes. .

Note Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go-rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using portable phones, computers, etc.

Instruction

1 Ask the students to read the rust paragraph quickly to get the main idea of the text.

2 Ask the students to do the following (without reading the text).

A Try to guess what the next paragraph will talk about.

Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

B Try to guess what the whole text will talk about. Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

3 Ask the students to use the answers from 2A and 2B to write a simple outline of the text. The students can work in pairs or groups to write the outline.

4 Let the students read the whole text. Ask them to compare their outline with the text and note any differences.

4. POST-READING

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 The title refers to the high pace of modem life and to the fact that portable devices, like cellphones and laptops, are becoming popular.

2 The text lists a couple of reasons: cellphones can distract students in class, cellphones may make students spend more time talking on the phone than doing homework.

3 The text lists two reasons: safety and the cool factor, i.e. the desire to be like others. Students may add other reasons.

4 Students are of course free to agree or disagree. Make sure that the students give reasons for their opinion.

Questions 2 and 3 can be answered by skimming or scanning. For question 1, students may use the pre-reading discussion and their own thinking. The text does include the phrase life on the go, so additional help is available. Question 4 is perhaps best answered after a pair or group discussion.

2 Sample Outline

1 Wang Mei is an example of Chinese teenagers who have cellphones.

2 Cellphones can be used for many things.

For example: talking to people, sending mes5ages and pictures, .playing games, listening to music, keeping appointments

3 Cellphones also cause problems.

1 In school, cellphones may disturb lessons.

2 At home, students may spend too much time and money on phone calls.

4 There are several reasons why teenagers like cellphones.

1 Cellphones help us stay in touch with friends and family.

2 Cellphones make us feel safer.

3 Cellphones are fun and cool.

5 Wang Mei explains why she likes her cellphone and what she uses it for.

3 Various answers are possible.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Read the text fluently.

2. Get LANUAGE STUDY ready.

3. Go on remembering the new words and expressions in this unit.

Period 3

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.

2. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

（Omitted.）

3. LANGUAGE STUDY

Word study

Answers to the exercise:

1G 2C 3B 4A 5F 6I 7E 8D 9H

4. GRAMMAR

The Present Continuous Passive Voice:

To form the present continuous passive voice, use is / are being done, which gives the idea that an action is in progress at the moment.

e.g.: Money is being collected for the broadband project.

A report is being written about the negative effects of 'Cellphones in school.

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 Money for the broadband project is being collected.

2 A report about the negative effects of cellphones in school is being written.

3 A computer center for the students is being built.

4 The test-tube baby is being taken good care of by its parents.

5 Human cloning is being studied by some scientists.

6 The laws to protect the rights of women and children are being revised.

Answers to Exercise 2:

1 How much money a month is being spent on their cellphones?

2 What is being produced by this company?

3 Who is being interviewed for the job?

4 What is being sent to his friend's phone?

5 Whom are some programmes being developed for?

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Grasp the language points in the reading text.

2. Finish all the exercises in the Student’s Book.

3. Learn to use the Grammar in this unit.

Period 4

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Check the students on the grammar points.

2. Ask the students to translate some sentences.

2. GRAMMAR EXERCISES

(Omitted.)

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Instruction Writing this letter can be difficult as the students will have to struggle with the abstract concepts. Most of them will find it difficult to capture the essence of the abstract terms, but in the process of doing so they will discover useful techniques for conveying their ideas, e.g. giving examples. Acceptable essays should include a rough definition of the two terms (love and friendship), with examples, within the framework of a letter to Q12. Advanced essays should use the definitions / examples to show Q12 that love and friendship are necessary, i.e. advanced essays should use the expository parts to support a persuasive thesis. These are important criteria for assessment. Let the students read the story about Q12 and then write the letter. The students can work individually or in pairs or groups.

Sample writing:

April 3 2374

Dear Q 12,

My name is Xiao Hong and 1 am a middle school student in Dalian. I would like to tell you about two things that 1 think are very important. Please read what 1 have to say, because 1 think it may be helpful to you. 1 want to tell you about love and friendship.

Love is difficult to explain, but 1 will try. Love is a feeling between two people. It is a very happy and warm feeling. When two people love each other, they almost become one person. For example, if a father loves his child, he will feel sad when the child is sad and happy when the childis happy. There are many different kinds of love: you can love your parents or children, you can love your husband or your wife, or you can love someone outside your family.

Friendship is also a kind of love. When two people are friends, they try to understand and help each other. A good friend will be there for you even when you are having a difficult time. Friends do things together and share thoughts, feelings and ideas.

Love and friendship are necessary if we want a happy world. If there is love, people will not do bad things to each other; if we have friends, we won't have to feel lonely or afraid. When people feel lonely and afraid, they often get angry with others and do mean things. If we learn to love and be friends, we can live happily together and solve the problems and difficulties we must face in life.

Your friend,

Xiao Hong

The words “chelyabinsk” and “Irkutsk” may be new to us, but the sentence tells us that they are examples of large Russian cities.

CHECKPOINT

Answers to Checkpoint 9:

A computer centre is being built for the students.

The phones are also being used as cameras and radios. The phones are being used everywhere.

4. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

(Omitted.)

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Write a clear and beautiful short passage in the Exercise-book.

2. Preview WORKBOOK.

Period 5

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of some phrases.

2. Say something about the students’ writing.

2. LISTENING

Instruction Tell the students that they will hear about the International Space Station. Ask the students what they know about it and then let them listen to the tape I and complete the informati0n chart.

LISTENING TEXT:

The International Space Station

As you are listening to this, the International Space Station is moving around the Earth. The International Space Station is an international project to build a small city in space. Sixteen countries are working together to build a space station where scientists can conduct experiments and learn more about space and the earth. The sixteen international partners are the United States, Russia, Canada, Japan, Brazil, and the European Space Agency. The United States and Russia are leading the effort but every country is making an important contribution to the ISS.

The International Space Station is made up of several parts and will be about the size of two soccer fields when completed. The different parts will be added one by one. Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources, and others are for people to live in. The parts will be put together in space. When the new parts have been put together, space station astronauts will perform space walks to connect the parts to the station. The space walks are very dangerous and astronauts must be very careful one small mistake could be deadly! A total of 46 flights

will be necessary to connect the more than 100 parts. If all goes well, the station will be completed in a few years.

Note: The Europen space Agency involves 11 countries: France, Germany, Italy, Switzerland, Spain, the Netherlands, Belgium, Denmark, Norway, Sweden and the UK.

Answers to the exercises:

1

What is the task of the ISS? It is an international project to build the Internationals Space Station, a small city in space.

How many countries are building the station? 16

How big will the ISS be when finished? About the size of two soccer fields.

How many parts are needed? What will they be used for? More than 100.

Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources and others are for people to live in.

How is the ISS being built? First, the different parts will be put together in space. Then, the people who work at the space station will take space walks to connect the parts to the station.

How many flights are needed to connect the parts? 46.

When will the project be finished? In a few years.

2 Various answers are possible.

3. TALKING

Instruction Help the students prepare the lists of advantages and disadvantages. You can use one of the examples and let the whole class think of advantages and disadvantages and then write them on the blackboard. If necessary, you can also model one or two “turns” in the debate.

Technology Advantages Disadvantages

Cellphones ●Cellphones help us keep in touch withour friends and family.

●Cellphones help us send e-mails.

● Cellphones help us send photographs and messages.

. ● Cellphones help us… ●Using a cellphone is expensive.

●Overusing it may disturb our work.

●Spending too much time making phone calls. . Cellphones ...

Robots

●Robots can work in dirty and dangerous places.

●Robots can do boring things that humans do not want to do.

● Robots can work without sleep and food. ●Robots can't think or make decisions.

● People may become unemployed if robots are used instead of humans.

●Robots need electricity.

Computers

●Computers help us work faster.

●Computers can help us study and learn.

●Computers can help us solve difficult problems. ●Computers are expensive.

●Computers can't think or make decisions.

●Computers are sometimes difficult to use.

Sample Dialogue:

A: I think that cellphones have many advantages. They help us keep in touch with our friends and family and we can use them to get important information, like news and weather reports.

B: Well, maybe, but there are many disadvantages, too. Cellphones are expensive to buy and use, and people may use them where they shouldn't, like in the classroom. Many people call their friends just for fun and may end spending too much time on the phone.

A: That may be true for some people, but that's not really because of the phones. You could say the same about TV or computers. People shouldn't do too much of anything. Think about all the other advantages. For example, if I'm meeting my Mum at the bus station and she is late, she can call me and let me know so I won't have to worry or get lost. And if I do get lost, or if I'm in danger, I can call for help.

B: ...

4. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Get ready to be examined in the talking activities.

2. Preview all the exercises in the workbook.

Period 6

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the talking activities.

2. PRACTISING

Vocabulary

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 toothpick 2 Teenagers 3 calendar 4 appointment 5 behaviour 6 emergency

7 interview 8 planet

2 1 answer (n) 2 changes (n) 3 defeat (v) 4 touch (n) 5 hand (n) 6 handed (v)

7 change (v) 8 phone (n) 9 forces (v) 10 phoned (v) 11 force (n) 12 answer (v)

13 defeat (n) 14 touch (v)

3 1 C 2C 3B 4A. 5A

4 1 You may do whatever you want to do.

2 I'll teach whoever wants to learn.

3 We can start whenever you're ready.

4 Life won't be easy whichever road you take.

5 He makes friends wherever he goes.

6 It rained throughout the night.

7 In case of rain, they usually go travelling with an umbrella.

Grammar

Answers to the exercises:

1 done, completed, built, have, collecting, planned, collected, spent, made, being improved, planted, painted

2 National day is coming and People's Park is being prepared for it. Look! By the lake, one boat is being repaired and the other one is being. painted. Beside the boats, the trees are being planted and the flowers are being watered. Not far away, the building is being painted and its roof is being repaired...

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Reading

FUTURE TRAVEL: TELEPORATION

Introduction The text states that the concept of transportation has remained the same despite advances in science and technology. However, recent discoveries suggest that we may be able to change the way we view transportation. The text defines and explains teleportation and reports advances. in science that have made teleportation seem possible. The discovery is an example of how something once believed to be science fiction (or impossible) is becoming science (or reality). It is important to note that while the discovery described in the text is significant, the teleportation of human beings does not seem possible.

Extension Encourage the students to think about what a concept is and how it changes - or, in other words, how the way we think about the world interacts with what we know about it. Use the Adventure Travel reading in the student's book as an example of another conceptual change.

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 Teleportation is a combination of sending information through telephones or the Internet and transportation.

2 With normal transportation, a person or thing is moved from point A to point B. With teleportation, a person or thing is taken apart at point A and put together again at point B.,

3 Teleporting a human being would be very difficult since there are so many parts in a human body.

4 Various answers are possible. The text does make it clear that it. is very unlikely that human teleportation will become possible.

2 The students are asked to match each new word with the correct strategy. Ask them to scan the text for the word and then decide which strategy they could use to guess the meaning of the word.

Teleportation

Strategy: Some words are made up of two parts. We can use the meaning of each part to guess the meaning of the word.

The text emphasizes the mix of telephone and transportation and the students can use this to conclude that tele has been added to -portation to make up teleportation, meaning a combination of regular transportation and telecommunication.

Photons

Strategy: Some words are explained in the sentence. The explanation is often between commas (,), dashes (-), or brackets ( ).

The explanation is given in brackets in the text (particles that carry light).

Apart

Strategy: We can use words we already know to guess the meaning of words that mean the same or that have the opposite meaning.

The students are already familiar with the phrase put together and can use this knowledge to conclude that apart means the opposite of together.

3 1 People used to think it was impossible to use machines to talk to each other, but it has become possible with the invention of the telephone. In the future, we may even be able to use machines to send our thoughts to other people.

2 People used to think it was impossible to make a copy of a living thing, but it has become possible with the invention of cloning. In the future, we may even be able to clone human beings.

3 People used to think that it was impossible to make a machine that could do math, but it has become possible with the invention of the abacus and the computer. In the future, we may even be able to use machines that can think.

4. WRITING

Instruction Ask the students to think of inventions that have changed the way we live, e.g. the steam engine, electricity, the telephone, the computer, the Internet etc. What will the next big invention be and how will it change our life? The students are free to come up with their own ideas. Remind the students that they should give the new invention a name, explain (roughly) how it works or what it is, how it will be used (or what it will be used for) and how it will change our life.

Sample writing:

The Thinkuter

I think that the next big thing, the next important invention, will be a computer that can actually think. I don't mean that this computer will be like a human being - it will not be able to come up with its own ideas

but it will be able to help us think. The computers we use today can only do very simple things, like adding and subtracting, or storing and recalling information. The new machine will be able to do things that we do when we think. Since it is a computer that can think, I will call it a thinkuter.

If we have thinkuters, we can do things that used to be impossible. For example, today, with normal computers, only a few very smart people can solve important problems. And even these experts can only solve the problems in the same way. With a thinkuter, we would be able to think in new ways and change the way we understand life, science, and nature. A thinkuter would give us more thinking power and we would be able to do more with our ideas. Everybody has lots of good ideas, even children do, but it is difficult to turn one's ideas into reality. If people had thinkuters, they could use their ideas better - no idea would be wasted.

With thinkuters, we would also need to spend less time in school. We could learn more and faster. School is good for us and we need it, but if we could learn more and faster, we would have more time to do other things that are also important.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Finish all the exercises in this UNIT.

2. Finish the supplementary exercises given by the teacher.

Period 7

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER SUPPLIMENTARY EXERCISES

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

Period 8

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER NEW WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS IN UNIT 2

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

高一英语课件 篇11

1. He sat at the desk, __________ a novel.

A. read B. to read C. reading D. reads

2. If you cheat in the exam, you could hardly _________ it.

A. throw away B. get away C. get away from D. get away with

3. No potatoes for me—I’m _______ a diet.

4. The speed of cars and trucks is _____ to 30 kilometers per hour in large cities in China.

A. limited B. limiting C. limiting to D. limited to

5. Smoking is a bad habit. You should _________ it.

A. throw away B. get away with C. get rid of D. throw

6. I’m really tired _______ Tom. He had me _________ for two hours in the rain.

A. of, waiting B. with; wait C. of; waited D. with; waited

7. Bob ran the 100 meters in 9.91 seconds, and I have not seen ________ this year. (浙江 2005)

A. the best B. better C. the most D. more

8. Filled with anger, he didn’t shout or swear, but just ________ silently at me.

A. looked B. stared C. glared D. glanced

9. — Why was Tom scolded by our teacher? — For ________.

A. tell a lie B. telling lies C. told lies D. telling lie

10. — Anything new in the new regulations? — They will be ________ to us all.

A. of great benefit B. do harms C. do many good D. for the benefit

11. Must I get through the business in one evening? No, you ________.

A. mustn’t B. haven’t C. needn’t to D. don’t have to

12. Your article is too long. You must _______ to about 3000 words.

A. cut it off B. cut it up C. cut it down D. cut it into

13. If your knowledge can be in some way _______ with my experiences, we are sure to succeed.

A. joined B. united C. connected D. combined

14. The news was so ____ that all the people present at the meeting were _______ at it.

A. amazing, amazing B. amazed, amazed C. amazing, amazed D. amazed, amazing

15. You ______be sitting in this waiting room, sir. You see, it is for women and children only.

A. oughtn’t to B. dare not C. need not D. will not

阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从1~10各题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项，并把答案写在答题卷上。

Every person needs water and a diet of healthy foods. These foods should contain some fat, some fiber, a little salt and so on.

People need energy 16 . They eat different kinds of food which change into energy. The energy is 17 in calories. Even when you 18 , you are using energy – about 65 calories an hour. 19 you are at school, or walking home, your body is burning up 100 calories an hour. When playing football or basketball, you 20 be using 400 calories an hour. On Sports Day, during the relay race, you will use most of all, 21 as much as 650 calories an hour.

The Chinese diet is considered to be the healthiest in the world. It contains a lot of fruit and green vegetables. It is 22 in fiber and low in sugar and fat. The Chinese eat less sugar than many other countries in the world. That is 23 lots of people in China have healthy white teeth.

People in the Western world do not eat such healthy foods. They eat 24 fat and sugar and don’t take enough 25 . Because of this, they 26 weight very easily. Their diet contains a lot of fat in the 27 of potato crisps, potato chips, butter, cream and chocolate. They eat a lot of sugar which exist in cakes, soft drinks, 28 and so on. The result is that many of them become fat. 29 some have bad teeth. In some parts of Britain, one person in ten, 30 the age of thirty, has no teeth left.

16. A. for lifeB. to live C. to live withD. for a living

17. A. measuringB. takenC. measuredD. measure

18. A. are asleepB. fall asleepC. go to sleep D. go to bed

20. A. mustB. canC. needD. might

21. A. surelyB. usuallyC. perhapsD. hardly

24. A. much tooB. many tooC. too manyD. too much

25. A. exercisesB. foodC. workD. exercise

26. A. put onB. gain onC. get onD. put up

27. A. typeB. formC. kindD. sort

28. A. sweetsB. sweetC. candy barD. sweet thing

阅读下列短文，从每题所给的'四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项，并把答案写在答题卷上。 A．

A car needs gas to run and your body also needs food to work for you. Eating the right kind of food is very important. It can keep your body strong, so take care of what you eat.

There are four main food groups altogether. The dairy products group has food like milk, cheese and sour milk. The other three groups are the meat and fish group, the fruit and vegetable group, and the bread and rice group. Each meal should have at least one food from all the four main groups. With all these food together you will be given enough energy during the day.

It is easy to get into bad eating habits. You may eat your breakfast in a hurry to get to school on time. Or you may not have time for a good lunch. It may seem easy to finish your supper with fish and chips all the time. But you will find yourself tired during these days and you can not think quickly.

Watching what you eat will help keep your body healthy and strong. It is also good to take some exercise. It will help you eat more if you take a walk or play games in the open air. Having a good eating habit with some exercise is the key to your health.

31. Which of the following diets do you think is the best one?

A. Eggs, tomatoes and chicken.B. Milk, bread, cabbages and beef.

C. Corn, fish, cream and pork. D. Rice, beancurd, apples, fish and chicken.

32. Which of the following is a good eating habit?

A. Going to school without any breakfast.B. Eating fish and chips for supper all the time.

C. Finishing your lunch in a very short time.

D. Having at least one food from all the four groups each meal.

33. In this passage the writer mainly tells us that ______.

A. every person needs food to grow wellB. taking exercise can keep your body strong

C. right kind of food with exercise will keep you healthy

D. enough energy helps people think more quickly

B.

Good health is the most valuable thing a person can have, but one cannot take good health for granted. It is important to remember that the body needs proper care in order to be healthy. There are three things that a person can do to help stay in good shape: eat right food ,get enough sleep, and exercise regularly.

Proper nutrition (营养) is important for good health. Your body cannot work well unless it receives the proper kind of “fuel”(燃料).Don't eat too much food with lots of sugar and fat. Eat plenty of foods high in protein (蛋白质) ,like meat, fish, eggs and nuts. Vegetables and fruits are very important because they provide necessary vitamins (维他命) and minerals. However, don't overeat. It is not helpful to be overweight.

Getting the proper amount of sleep is also important. If you don't get enough sleep, you feel tired and easily get angry. You have no energy. Over a long period of time a little a amount of sleep may even result in a change of personality (人的个性).Be sure to allow yourself from seven to nine hours of sleep each night. If you do, your body will feel strong and refreshed, and your mind will be sharp.

Finally, get plenty of exercise. Exercise firms the body, strengthens the muscles, and prevents you from gaining weight. It also improves your heart and lungs. If you follow a regular exercise program, you will probably increase your life-span (寿命).Any kind of exercise is good. Most sports are excellent for keeping the body in good shapes: basketball, swimming, bicycling, running and so on are good examples. Sports are not only good for your body, but they are enjoyable and interesting, too.

If everybody, were to eat the right foods, get plenty of sleep and exercise regularly, the world would be a happier and healthier place. We would all live to be much older and wiser.

34. According to the passage,_________.

B. if we were healthy, we could spend our days in doing things with less sleep

C. one can eat a lot to stay in good shape

D. one needn't take any exercise if he is healthy

35.In order to keep good health, ___________ .

A. we should eat a lot of sweets B. one needs a large amount of fat

C. people should eat according to the foods nutrition D. we must try to sleep now and then

36. Eating more and sleeping less________.

A. can keep healthy B. is no good for you

C. gets you more energy D. will keep your personality

37.The writer explains ________in this passage.

A. how to eat B. the importance of doing exercise

C. how to keep healthy D. what to eat

38.The title of the article should be___________ .

A. Eating and Exercising B. How Vitamins Work in Man's Body

C. Staying Healthy D. Sleeping Well

C.

Isn't it astonishing how much time we spend talking about food? “Have you ever eaten …?” “What did you have for lunch?” and so on. And yet when you travel from one country to another, you will find that people have quite different feelings about food. People often feel that what they eat is normal (正常) and that what other people eat is strange or silly. In most parts of Asia, for example, no meal is complete without rice. In England, people eat potatoes every day. In the Middle East, bread is the main part of every meal. Eating like so many things we do, becomes a habit which is difficult to change. Americans like to drink a lot of orange juice and coffee. The English drink tea four or five times every day. Australians drink a great deal of beer, and the French drink wine every day.

The sort of meat people like to eat also differs from one country to another. Horse meat is thought to be delicious in France. In Hong Kong, some people enjoy eating snakes. New Zealander eat sheep, but they never eat goat meat. The Japanese don't like to eat sheep meat be-cause of its smell, but they enjoy eating raw fish (生鱼).

So it seems that although eating is a topic we can talk about for hours, there is very little common sense in what we say it. People everywhere enjoy eating what they have always eaten, and there is very little we can do to change our eating habits.

39. Which of the following is true according to the article?

A. All people have the same feeling about food.

B. In most parts of Asia, people usually have rice for meals.

C. People often consider other people to be strange or silly.

D. The topic people spend time talking about is bread and meat.

40. People in different countries .

A. drink the same sort of wineB. have the same eating habit

C. eat different kinds of meatD. have the same tea at different time within a day

41. The Japanese don't like to eat sheep meat .

A. because they dislike its smellB. because it is too expensive

C. because it is easy to go badD. because they think it will do harm to their health

42. English people drink tea four or five times a day .

A. because they get thirsty easilyB. because there is plenty of tea in Britain

C. because of their drinking habitD. because they have enough time to do so

第一节：根据句子的意思，写出正确的单词，并注意词的正确形式。（共10小题；10分）。

1. He gained all his ________(力量) and was ready for a second try.

2. I patted her _______(温柔地) on the shoulder.

3. It is healthier to keep a b_______ diet every day.

4. This restaurant was not giving its ______(顾客) energy-giving food.

5. ________ (好奇心)drove Wang Pengwei inside Yong Hui’s restaurant.

6. Wang Pengwei stopped worrying and started advertising the _______(好处) of his food.

7. To succeed, we must ___________(结合) talent with working hard.

8. He has been working for a long time, but he is still full of __________.（energetic）

9. You should do some _________(研究) before making the final decision.

10. She is not _________(苗条的)enough to wear these tight trousers.

1. When we are cooking with a gas fire, we ________(can / must) keep the window open.

2. Mr. Joseph has stayed in the US for several years. He _____(may / can) speak English quite well.

3. Jack’s ill, so they ______ (must / have to) change their plans.

4. It _______ (can't / mustn't) be Miss Gao. I know she has gone to Beijing.

5. You say you ________ not do it but I say you ____________ (shall / will)

第三节：根据中文意思完成句子(共5小题；10分)。

1. 我用了一个月才摆脱咳嗽。It took me a month to _____ _____ _____my cough.

2. 她欠我100块钱。 She _______ ________ _______ to me for 100 yuan RMB.

3. 我们应该抛弃考试作弊的坏习惯。We should ________ _________ the bad habit of cheating in the exam.

4.他们没有打架，只是站在那怒视对方。They didn’t fight, but stood there _____ ______ one another.

5．David 靠给报社写文章维生。David ____ _____ ______ by writing articles for newspapers.

高一英语课件 篇12

作者：贺 莉 自：本站原创 点击数：581 文章录入：helen

Teaching plan for SB1A Unit 9 Technology

Teaching goals: Talk about science and technology

Describe things and how they work

Express agreement and disagreement

Use the present Continuous Passive Voice

Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

Write a letter to Q12 about love and friendship

Time arrangement:

Period 1 Warming up, listening, speaking

Period 2 Pre-reading, reading, post-reading

Period 3 Intensive reading

Period 4 Language study

Period 5 Integrating skills

Period 6 Workbook (Talking and Reading)

Period 7 Test

Period one ( listening and speaking )

Warming up

Step I Brainstorming about Technology

1. Is technology important to us? What will you think of when talking about technology?

2. What qualities shall we have if we want to have advanced technology?

( to be creative , good at solving problems and thinking in new ways )

Step II Activity

( Bring the items of a toothpick, plastic bag and left-handed glove if possible)

(Hold a competition of creativity among groups of students if necessary)

1. Students work in groups to solve the problems

2. Compare different solutions and talk about creativity.

Listening

Step I Introduction

1. Describe an everyday object for Ss to guess. (color/ size/ shape/ use etc.)

Step II listening

1. First-listening: what is being described?

2. Second-listening: what can the things be used for?

3. Discussion in pairs: what are the new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses?

Step III A riddle-guessing competition

1. Read the instruction and the guided questions

2 Do a demonstration with a student.

Teacher: You seem to have something in your pocket. What does it look like?

Student: It looks like … ….

T: What is it made of ?

S: It’s made of …….

T: What is it used for ?

S: … … …

3 Ss practice in pairs

4 Competition--- Who can guess it ?

One student thinks of or hides an object in his pocket, while the rest raise questions to guess what it is.

Speaking

Step I Brainstorming

1. Present the situation

2. Brainstorming about the advantages and disadvantages about cellphones

Step II Expressions of agreement and disagreement

Teach new expressions

1) Absolutely= Definitely= Exactly

2) It depends.

3) That’s a good point.

4) That’s worth thinking about.

Step III Activity

1. Ss works in groups and prepare a role play.

2. Ss present their dialogues.

3. Debate: Players from different groups debate the advantages and disadvantages of a cellphone.

Homework: 1. Listening : Workbook P133 Listening Ex 1&2

2. Speaking: Interview your parents the way of life 30 years ago ( Were there telephones , TVs or computers ? )

3. Thinking : P60 Ex 3 Design your cellphone--- to be creative!

Period Two ( extensive reading )

Revision

Check the listening homework on page 133.

Pre-reading

Step I Discussion (Question 2 of Pre-reading )

1. Check the speaking homework of interview

How did people live 30 years ago?

What did people do at night without electricity?

How have inventions and new technology changed our way of life?

2. Talk about the title---Life on the go

Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go---rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using cellphones, computers, etc.

Reading

Step I Presentation

1. Talk about the cellphone and present the new vocabulary.

( Ask Ss to bring cellphones of different brands to class if possible)

Questions: What functions does a cellphone have?

What features does your cellphone have? etc.

Vocabulary: function, feature, image, an electronic calendar, remind ,appointment

2. The top question:

Why are cellphones so popular with teenagers according to the passage?

Step II Reading

1. Skimming for the top question.

2. Some T or F statements to check the general understanding of the passage.

3. Scanning for the main idea of each paragraph, comparing general statement and specific statement. ( Post-reading Ex 2 on Page 60 )

Step III Activity

1. Discussion in pairs ( Post-reading Ex 1 on Page 60 ).

2. Design your own cellphone in groups.

Homework: 1. Read the text after the tape, marking the difficulties.

2. Reading comprehension: WB page 136.

Period Three ( intensive reading )

Revision

Revise the text .

Language points

Vocabulary

1. depend v. dependent adj. independent adj.

1) That depends. = It depends. = I’m not completely sure.

2) depend on 依赖，信任，取决于

e.g. His family depends on him.

We’re depending on you to finish the job by Friday.

Happiness often depends on your attitude to life.

2. add v.

1) 增加， 相加， 补充说

e.g. Add a few more names to the list.

If you add 5 and 3 you get 8.

I should like to add that we are pleased with the result.

2) add to = to increase something

e.g. The rise in electricity costs has added to our difficulties.

3) add up to = amount to

e.g. These numbers add up to 100.

3. remind v.

remind sb to do sth.

of sth.

that –clause

e.g. Remind me to write to Dave.

This hotel reminds me of the one we stayed in last year.

She reminded me that Sue was in Paris.

4. touch n.

get in touch with sb. lose touch with sb.

stay in touch with be in touch with

keep in touch with be out of touch with

5. call v.

call for = to demand sth. , to collect sb.

call at some place = visit some place

call on sb. = to visit sb., to ask sb. to do sth.

call in = to ask sb. to come in{

e.g. Students are calling for more spare time and less homework.

I'll call for you at 8 o'clock.

I think we'd better call in a doctor.

I called on my uncle while I was in London.

6. case n.

in case in this case

in case of + n./pron in any case

in case --clause in no case = never

e.g. The meeting will be put off in case it rains.

In case he arrives before I get back, please ask him to wait.

In case of fire, ring the bell.

I don't think I need any money, but I'll bring some in case.

In no case should we give up dreaming about a better future.

7. need n.

[U] 缺乏； 需要

[C] 需要得东西； 必需品

in need of sth.

no need for sth.

e.g. There’s a growing need for new housing in big cities.

She didn’t earn enough money to satisfy all her needs.

We’re collecting money for children in need.

Please come to me if ever you’re in need of help.

There’s no need for you to say sorry to me.

Sentence patterns

1. Cellphones make it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere.

e.g. I think it necessary for her to stay in touch with her parents .

He found it possible for them to improve the working condition.

Our school makes it a rule for us to have an English Corner every Friday.

2. We have a need to stay in touch with friends no matter where we are or what we are doing.

e.g. Nobody believed him no matter what he said.

No matter where he goes, the thief can’t escape being caught.

She always goes swimming no matter how cold it is.

3. She says that her cellphone helps her do whatever she wants to do.

e.g. Whatever you do, wherever you go, I’ll be right here waiting for you.

She always goes swimming, however cold it is.

Homework: 1. WB page 134-135 Vocabulary Ex1,2,3&4

Period Four ( Language study )

Word study

Step I Page 61 Match the words with their meaning

Step II Check the homework on page 134-135.

Step III Reading for meaning ---guessing the words from the clues.

Page 63 Tips Are you a smart reader?

Grammar

The passive voice (3) --- The Present Continuous Passive Voice

Step I Study the examples

am/ is/ are + being + done

Step II Practice ( page 61 )

Step III Activity

Two students put on a performance of “双簧”.

The door is being pushed open slowly and quietly. A chair is being taken into the room and put at the desk. A piece of paper is being taken out of his pocket. The chair is being cleaned. Now he is sitting down. And some books are being moved to the side of the desk. The schoolbag is being opened, and an English book is being taken out…….

Homework: 1. WB page 136 Grammar 1&2

Period Five ( integrating skills )

Reading

Step I Reading

What is the computer Q12 like ?

How does it control human beings?

What other suggestions will you make to solve the problem?

What will the earth be like if Q12 understands love and friendship?

Step II Language points

1 take over 接管

e.g. The company has been taken over by a American firm.

Sarah will take over my job when I leave.

2 break down （机器）不运转；失败；

break up 结束； （关系）破裂

e.g. The car broke down on the motorway.

The peace talks between the two countries have broken down

The meeting broke up after only half an hour.

Their relationship wasn’t working, so they decided to break up.

3 come up with = to think of or suggest an idea 想出办法，提出建议

e.g. He couldn’t come up with an answer.

How have you come up with such a good idea?

4 success in manage to do sth.

sucessful in

succeed in doing sth. fail to do sth.

e.g. We had no success in finding a new flat.

Jane finally succeeded in passing the her driving test.

Writing

Step I Study the outline of the letter

Step II Students have a discussion in pairs.

Step III Ask a student to give a sample letter orally.

Homework: 1. write a letter to Q12

Period Six ( WB talking and reading )

Talking

WB page 134 Talk about modern technology.

Step I Read the situation

Step II Activity

Ss work in groups

First list the advantages and disadvantages of the inventions of cellphones, robots and computers.

Then Ss have a debate in groups.

Step III Debate

Have 3 debates between groups.

( There are speakers representing each group, and the rest are judges)

Reading

WB page 136 Reading Future travel: teleportation

Step I Fast reading and skimming

What does teleportation mean?

Step II Scanning

How is teleportation different from normal transportation?

Why is it so difficult to teleport human beings?

Step III Reading for words

Match the words with the best strategy on page 137.

Step IV Activity

Discussion : Will teleportation be realized?

Think of more impossible things that may be possible in the future.

一只小鸟课件收藏十二篇

居安思危，思则有备，有备无患。在日常的学习工作中，幼儿园教师都会提前准备一些能用到的资料。资料的定义比较广，可以指生活学习资料。参考资料会让未来的学习或者工作做得更好！所以，你是否知晓幼师资料到底是怎样的形式呢？考虑到你的需要，小编特地编辑了“一只小鸟课件收藏十二篇”，欢迎大家参考阅读。

一只小鸟课件【篇1】

一、导入。

同学们，前几天我们写了一篇描写声音的作文，有许多同学在作文中都描写了同一种声音，是什么声音呢？听！（播放：鸟的叫声）对了，是鸟的叫声。请你再闭上眼睛仔细听听，想象一下这是一幅什么样的画面呢？（生答）

你说的真好，让我们大家有种身临其境的感觉。是啊，鸟儿的叫声多么清脆，多么好听，如果这世界上真的再也听不到鸟儿的叫声，再也看不到鸟儿在林间欢快飞翔的身影，那该是件多么遗憾的事情啊！可是，这样的事却真的发生了！

这节语文课，老师就和同学们一起来读读发生在一只小鸟身上的故事，好吗？（板书：一只小鸟；点课件）

二、初读课文，摸清脉络。

1、 翻开书，自己轻声的读读课文，看看自己是否把字音读准了，把句子读通顺了。

2、 那么文章写了这只小鸟的什么事呢？请同学们听老师来读遍课文，你画出自然段，并试着说说文章写了这只小鸟的什么事好吗？（一只小鸟的故事主要讲了：一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上歌唱，孩子们非常喜欢它，就用弹弓打伤了小鸟，两只老鸟接住小鸟把它带回了巢中。从此孩子们再也没有听到小鸟的歌声。）

3、 那么这是一篇叙事的文章，是按照事情的发展顺序来描写的。也就是说先写了事情的起因（板书），再写经过（板书），最后写结果（板书）。那么我们来看看这篇文章哪几个自然段写了1、这就是事情的起因，哪几个自然段写了2、这就是事情的经过，哪几个自然段写了3呢，这就是事情的结果？

三、品读细想，模仿想象。

1、弄清了课文的主要内容，我们也不得不接受了这样一个残酷的现实：那就是一只可爱的小鸟被人打伤了！是谁造成了这样的悲剧？原因又是什么呢？好心的同学们你们能在文中找到答案吗？（回答）你从哪看出来孩子们非常的喜爱这只小鸟呢？

2、让这么多的孩子都很喜爱的是一只什么样的小鸟呢？请大家在小组里读读第一和第二自然段，用笔画一画，再和同学说一说。一会再告诉大家行吗？

3、谁愿意读读第一和第二自然段呢？（生答）师：这真是一只快乐可爱的小鸟啊！

4、哪位同学能想象一下小鸟快乐的心情，到前面来表演一下这只可爱的小鸟呢？其他的同学和周老师都把自己当做自然中的一棵树或是一朵花，让我们用肢体来配合他一下，让我们含笑着倾听她美妙动听的歌声吧！

5、这么可爱的小鸟谁不喜欢呢？可是，不幸的事情还是发生了！一个弹子飞来，打伤了小鸟，当时的情况是怎么样的？谁能给大家读读？其他同学想想在这一部分你读明白了什么呢？

6、哪一位父母不爱自己的孩子，哪一位父母能眼睁睁的看着自己的孩子受到伤害？此时的他们心急如焚、此时的他们肝肠寸断。我们怎样才能读出老鸟当时的那种急切、悲伤的心情呢？同学们试试。

7、那么刚才还活蹦乱跳的小鸟呢？他怎么样了？你觉得这只小鸟怎么样？（太可怜了）我们看了心也会碎的！你能试着读读这一句吗？

8、这是一幅怎样的画面啊？一对悲伤焦急的父母含着眼泪望着自己受伤的孩子，孩子正痛苦的流着血。孩子们啊，我们怎么可以？怎么可以？让这么可爱无辜的小生命受到伤害呢？让我们齐读课文的最后两个自然段，边读边体会此时孩子们的心情。

四、拓展延伸、情感升华。

1、故事讲到这里你明白了什么？你想到了什么？能不能跟大家说说？如果让你跟那些打小鸟的孩子们说两句话，你会跟他们说什么？

2、光悔恨是没有用的，我们还必须用我们的实际行动去帮助小鸟，我们应该怎么做呢？请同学们看这个动画片，然后再说说。

3、教师激情结语，引出请爱护鸟类和人类共同的家园地球主题升华。

一只小鸟课件【篇2】

教学目标

1.通过学习使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2.初步练习读懂每个自然段的意思。

3.继续学习抓重点词语边读边想。

教具：投影仪 学生准备剪纸鸟

教学过程

师：上节课我们已经读熟了课文，说说课文写了小鸟什么事？

师：大家翻开书自己读课文。你觉得这是一只怎样的小鸟？联系有关语句说一说。

生：这是一只快乐的小鸟。

师：你从课文的哪儿读到的？

生：读书

师：从哪些词感觉到快乐？（啁 啾…）你们能把他们这种快乐通过朗读表现出来吗？

生：这是一只可爱的小鸟。

师：你从课文的哪儿读到的？……

师：选自己最喜欢的一句话读给同桌听一听，互相评一评

师：多美的景致，多可爱的小鸟，咱们怀着美好的心情读一读第二自然段。（齐读）

师：鸟儿欢快的歌声吸引了树下玩乐的孩子，他们天天来听小鸟唱歌，有一天，一件令人心痛的事情发生了。

师：默读5、6段，读到自己感受很深的句子就画下来，还可以把自己的感受用几个词语概括地写在句子旁边。交流体会（多找几个学生谈），教师投影出示有关句子，指导朗读。

（1）它正要发声，忽然“啪”的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去。

（2）斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

（3）它的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来。

师：你怎样评价树下的那几个孩子？

师：在我们身边，还有哪些不爱护鸟类的行为？

师：读了《一只小鸟》的故事，你有什么话想对小鸟或者孩子说？请同学们拿出你们自己剪的小鸟，把想说的话写在上面。

生：汇报、交流。

师：同学们，美丽的鸟儿，美丽的生活，美丽的大自然，都需要我们用心去呵护，真正的喜爱，不是占有、不是破坏，而是让美丽的事物更加美丽，让美丽的世界更加美丽。让我们怀着美好的心情再次朗读课文。

下课。

板书：

快乐 可爱

6、一只小鸟 让世界更加美丽

受到伤害

一只小鸟课件【篇3】

教学要求：

1、通过学习故事唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。

2、可结合课文练习概括每个自然段的意思。

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象。

教学重点难点：

通过学习故事唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。

教学时间：两课时

教学准备：挂图、小黑板

教学过程：

第一课时

一、揭示课题

学习了《翠鸟》这篇课文后，同学们对小鸟产生了更加深厚的喜爱之情，如果你发现树上有一只可爱的小鸟，它的妈妈正好出去觅食了，你会怎样做呢？

揭示《一只小鸟》

二、感知课文

1、自由读课文，想想课文讲了一件什么事？

2、小鸟、老鸟、小朋友分别给你留下了什么印象？

三、学习字词

1、同桌合作，读通课文。主要把生字和生僻字读准。

2、抽学生分别读课文8个自然段，并说说每段主要写了什么？

（注意抓住要点：谁或什么在哪儿或什么时间干什么）

3、认读生字词，读准：

zhīmǎnmqīngdndiēyǎng

树枝丰满觅食倾听掸子跌了下来仰望

cholingxinxzhōujiū

鸟巢翎毛衔着缝隙啁啾

多音字：弹dn（子弹）tn弹琴

4、注意字形：觅字的爪字头的写法

仰字没有一撇

5、学生记住字形，当场听写。

6、给生字组词。

四、练习巩固：

抄写生字词

朗读课文

第二课时

一、读课题，导入新课

二、你认为这是一直怎样的小鸟？为什么？

1、读课文一、二自然段，学生讨论

2、交流反馈：

一只幼小的小鸟：它的羽毛还未丰满，不能远飞，每天只能在巢里啁啾。

一只快乐的有父母保护的小鸟：和两只老鸟说着话儿，她们都觉得非常快乐。

一只可爱的小鸟：它的脑袋里忽然充满了新意，抖刷抖刷翎毛，飞到树枝上，放出那赞美自然的歌声来。

3、练习朗读读出小鸟的可爱和快乐，读出画面的和谐美。

三、鸟妈妈、鸟爸爸给你留下了怎样的印象？

1、读课文3-6自然段，讨论以上问题。

2、抓住重点句理解：斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

四、孩子们给你留下了什么印象？从哪里看出来的？

体会孩子们喜爱小鸟但又伤害了小鸟的行为。

读课文7、8自然段，想象：小鸟消失后，孩子们的心情怎样/他们会怎么想？

（使学生明白什么样的行为才是真正的喜爱。）

过了十年，一切有了什么变化？

五、回读课文，升华情感

有感情地读课文，说说自己读完课文后的感想。

六、想象练说

那只小鸟后来怎样了？同桌互相练说，然后抽学生上台说。

一只小鸟课件【篇4】

活动目标：

1.了解小鸟的特征，学习波浪形折纸。

2.能运用剪，贴，折等的技能进行创作。

3.感受创作的乐趣，体验成功的喜悦。

4.培养幼儿的观察、操作、表达能力，提高幼儿的审美情趣及创新意识。

5.培养幼儿耐心完成任务的习惯，享受折纸活动的乐趣。

活动准备：

1.彩纸2.剪刀3.双面胶4.铅笔，直尺，橡皮。5.勾线笔 6.录像设备7.音乐

活动过程：

一.开始部分：

导入：

1.师：“今天教大家来制作一只小小鸟，那怎么做呢?”

2.介绍制作材料和工具。

二.中间环节：

示范制作步骤：

1.拿一张彩纸，把彩纸剪成一条长方形。

2.反复对折，折成波浪形状。

3.中间对折一下，然后用剪刀把两边对角剪掉。

4.再剪一条长方形，重复2，3步骤

5.把两个剪好的折纸用双面胶粘在一起，打开折纸呈花朵形状。

6.分别画好小鸟的尾巴，眼睛，翅膀，嘴巴，然后剪下来粘贴。

三.结束部分

播放音乐，制作背景，呈现完成的小鸟结束此活动。

活动反思

本次微课我利用了最普遍最常用的手工折纸来进行教学，小鸟是幼儿在生活中最常见的动物，对于幼儿来说并不陌生。为了更好地呈现，我通过手机拍摄，制作步骤分解，并进行示范讲解，给幼儿一目了然的视觉效果。为了不让幼儿在观看时感到无聊生硬，我为视频加入了愉悦的背景音乐来给整个活动增添一丝生趣，微课录完后我觉得我有些地方只注重制作步骤，在活动导入部分过渡的有些仓促，在今后的微课教学中我会多加注意，注重每个细节。

一只小鸟课件【篇5】

一、说教材

《一只小鸟》是北师大版三年级上册《鸟儿》单元中的一篇主体课文，这篇课文，出自文学名匠冰心之手，语言清新流畅，是一篇非常优美的散文。文章主要讲了一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上唱歌，被孩子们打中后两只老鸟把它接住并带回巢中的事。文章以爱为主旋律，歌颂了亲情的伟大；批评了不成熟的儿童爱，因爱的方式不对，给鸟儿带来了伤害；告诉我们生命是平等的，人与自然之间应该是和谐的，我们人类应该爱护自然、保护自然，应该有一颗真诚的爱心。教育孩子们对于世间一切美好的事物，不仅要爱，而且要会爱，爱不是自私地占有，不是无情地伤害，而是欣赏、呵护和无私的奉献。

二、说教学目标、重难点、教学目标：

1、能够正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。

2、通过学习课文使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大；

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象，理解课文内容。

教学重点、难点：

1、能够正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。

2、通过学习课文使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大；

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象，理解课文内容。

三、说教学方法

学生升入三年级后，已经掌握了一定的观察想象、口头表达、交流合作、朗读等方面的能力，但是这些方面的能力都不强，比较薄弱，比如观察不细致，不能进行充分的合作交流，口头表达方面说话不够流利、完整、通顺，朗读水平不高等等这些能力都有待于老师在今后的教学中不断地培养，不断提高。针对学生的现状又结合教材的特点我设计了通过运用朗读法、小组合作交流法、图文结合法、理解重点词句法来进行本课的教学，并对学生各方面的能力进行进一步的培养和锻炼。

四、说教学过程

《小学语文教学法原理》告诉我们，语文教学中的阅读，是关系到培养读写能力和发展智力的一种发展性阅读。读一篇文章，先要让学生感知文字，从字词到句，从句子到段落，从段落到全篇，逐步读懂。结合《一只小鸟》一文的具体情况，在教学中的具体操作程序是这样安排的：

一、激趣导入

因本节课是第二课时的学习，一开始我便以昨天我们认识了一只小鸟朋友，今天它又来到了我们的课堂，大家还想继续了解它吗？导语导入，（通过小鸟朋友这样亲切的叫法，拉近学生与小鸟的距离，激发学生的学习兴趣）

复习，检查字词的掌握情况。

谁能说说课文主要讲了一件什么事？（检查学生对课文主要内容的掌握情况，锻炼学生的口头表达能力。）

二、细读课文，体会感悟

新课标要求，理解课文要以读为主，读中感悟，读中体会，俗话说读书百遍，其义自现。第一部分的学习我设计运用朗读、小组合作探究等教学方法突破重点。我设计围绕这是一只怎样的小鸟？你是从哪些地方看出来的？这个问题，从问题入手，让学生带着问题静心潜读课文，与鸟儿作心灵的吟唱，通过小组讨论学习，让学生充分发挥学习积极性，学会合作，学会探究，在愉快的交流过程中学会知识，再经过全班交流，学生对鸟儿的外形、活动、叫声应该已经有了一定的了解，鸟儿那机灵可爱的样子便会跃然纸上。如此可爱快乐的小鸟，我们应该怎样读才能体现出它的快乐呢？此时趁机指导学生有感情地朗读，让学生在读中感悟小鸟的可爱快乐，通过学生自由练读、指名读、生评读、老师适时的激发、导读，我想学生应该可以读得活、读出韵味。此时又我设计了同学们对第一部分的学生还有什么不懂或不明白的地方吗？这样一个质疑的环节，一方面可以训练学生提出问题、解决问题的能力，让学生学会质疑；另一方面可以点出重点，如啁啾是个生僻字（形容鸟儿的叫声）；有些学生可能不太理解，可以让学生帮助解答；再如自然在这里指大自然，不仅要让学生明白大自然除了有灿烂的阳光，葱绿的树木等等，还应该引导学生感受到因为有了小鸟清脆柔美的歌声，大自然的这种和谐的美才能够展现得更加淋漓尽致。这样一来，也就为解释鸟类是我们人类的朋友，我们应该爱护它们找到了依据。最后我又设计以学生用肢体语言表现小鸟快乐可爱的形象及欣赏关于小鸟的图片、叫声的环节把学生对小鸟的快乐、可爱的理解推向高潮。

第二部分（36）是文章的重点，这一部分的学习，我设计了抓住重点词句，理解课文内容学习方法突破重难点。如这句它正要发声，忽然啪的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去忽然说明了什么？(意料之外)跌是什么意思为什么不用掉？（跌说明完全失去控制，很重的掉下来，说明鸟儿受伤很重）斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。斜刺里不好理解，让学生通过观察画面，仔细观察图中两只老鸟的动作，通过适当的动作或手势从而理解斜刺里，加深学生对内容的理解，激发学生表达的欲望，有效地锻炼学生的观察能力和语言表达能力。箭也似的说明像箭一样速度飞快；另外通过飞来、接住、衔上一系列动词体现出老鸟救子的急切心情；它的血从树隙里一滴一滴地落到地上来。一滴一滴说明什么？（学生只要理解小鸟流血过多，受伤严重）刚才还活蹦乱跳的雏鸟就这样受伤，就这样失去了生机、清脆的叫声甚至也许是生命。此时孩子的情感从高峰跌入谷底，他们为小鸟的不幸而悲愤，自然而然地达到了共鸣：爱不能成为一种伤害，爱应该是欣赏、呵护和奉献。通过对斜刺里箭也似的一滴一滴等重点词语的理解，加之教师适时的指导朗读，学生自由练读、指名读等有效地、充分地朗读，我觉得学生应该能体会亲情的伟大。

三、想象拓展

三年级的学生已具有一定的观察想像、口头表达和交流合作的学习能力，因此我安排了让学生想象：（1）故事讲到这里，你想对谁说些什么呢？(对小鸟、对鸟爸爸、鸟妈妈、或对孩子们、对人类)这个环节的设计我让学生把肚子里的话都倒出来放心大胆地说出来，锻炼学生口头表达能力的同时考察学生对文章内容的感悟，使学生的情感得到升华。(2)消失的歌声又再次出现了，这是怎么回事？设计续编故事这样的环节，进一步的培养锻炼学生的想象能力以及口头表达能力。

五、作业设计

我本着让学生自由作业，快乐学习的目的设计了三项选作题：

1、续写故事：后来，消失的歌声又出现了，这是怎么回事呢？

2、登陆网站了解更多关于鸟类的知识；

3、设计并制作标语牌，写上你创作的保护鸟儿的标语。

六、板书设计

好的板书是一篇文章的袖珍版，是课文精华的体现；好的板书更应具有深刻的启发性。我的板书设计力求体现这些，设计时按照故事的发展顺序，体现了文章的思路，从板书中可以发现抓住重点、突破难点的途径，并能用较为清晰的思路引导学生复述课文内容。（出示板书设计图）

语文应该是广阔的，字词的积累，文章的品析，情感的升华都应是语文的内涵。而生活这片广阔的天地更应是语文的外延。教育的最高境界应该是达到三个和谐，即让孩子与自身和谐，与周围生命和谐，与大自然和谐。教学本文，除学习语文基础知识（写字、朗读、表达）之外，更多的应该让孩子懂得对生命的敬畏：真正的的喜爱是对鸟儿的疼惜、照顾和爱护、鸟儿只有是活的才是最可爱的。所以应该让孩子们学会真正的爱的方式。

一只小鸟课件【篇6】

原创原因：一只小鸟飞在春天的田野里，开心的唱着歌，快乐的自由自在。通过本次幼儿园教案，激发孩子在生活中养成良好的卫生习惯，养成良好的习惯健康自己的身体。引发撕纸在教学中的乐趣。

目标：引导幼儿正确看待“禽流感”，培养幼儿的动手能力和耐心细致的习惯，初步学习撕纸的技能，练习撕圆，养成良好的卫生习惯。

准备：手工纸人手两份：一大二小、16K纸、记号笔、音乐

难点：撕圆

重点：培养动手能力

过程：

一、谈话：

1、关于“禽流感”

2、引导幼儿正确看待“禽流感”

3、导入：

小鸟：现在，由于“禽流感”人们都不欢迎我们了，我们感到很寂寞。

老师：我们请这些健康的小鸟来和我们一起玩，好吗？

二、撕小鸟

1、教师示范讲解，

幼儿跟学

X（1）撕小鸟：

身体：将大正方形纸的四个角都撕去——将光边撕去——慢慢撕成一个圆形。翅膀：用小正方形撕

（2）用记号笔添加嘴、脚

2、幼儿练习撕小鸟的好朋友（再撕一只小鸟，并添加嘴、脚）

三、添画背景

可以用撕下来的碎纸，也可以用记号笔。

四、听音乐学小鸟飞

（与小鸟一同游戏）

优秀教案推荐

又一只快乐的小鸟

活动目标：体验创造的快乐，在感受理解音乐的基础上，用不同动作表现音乐情境。

活动准备：表现小鸟生活的三段体音乐、录音机

活动过程：

1．我们和小鸟做了朋友高兴吗？下面我们再来听一首关于小鸟的音乐，听了以后，你觉得小鸟在干什么？

提问：你觉得小鸟在做什么？

2．让我们再来仔细地听听这首音乐有几段？每一段听上去是一样的吗？

提问：你听出来有几段？每一段是怎么样？

3．让我们来听听第一段的音乐速度怎么样？好像小鸟在干什么？

听后提问：这段音乐的速度怎么样？好像小鸟在干什么？（XX小朋友说得很好，你做给小朋友看看，大家来学学）

4．小鸟醒来后，觉得很轻松，我们一边来听一边来想一想，它还会做些什么？

听后提问：小鸟醒来后会做些什么？

我们一起来跟着音乐做小鸟捉虫、游戏的动作。

5．小鸟们玩了一天很累了，要回家休息了，我们来听听小鸟是怎么回家的？

提问：小鸟是怎么回家的？是怎样休息的？（幼儿听着音乐做小鸟回家、小鸟休息的动作）

你们想不想成为一只小鸟，让我们来做一只快乐的小鸟吧！跟着音乐飞吧！我们跟着音乐把你好看的动作表演给客人老师看吧！（幼儿自由表演）

一只小鸟课件【篇7】

学情分析：

本班学生共有60人，大部分来自农村或外来务工人员子女。三年级的学生，已初步形成了良好的学习习惯和学习方法，上课能专心听老师上课，认真做课堂笔记。有一部分学生还缺乏良好的学习习惯和正确的学习态度，对学习没有良好的认识，缺乏积极的学习态度，学习存在着惰性，喜欢依赖老师和家长，不是主动的去获取知识，靠的还是死记硬背。

教材分析：

本篇课文《一只小鸟》是北师大版小学语文三年级上册(五册)中第五单元的第二篇主体课文。本文的作者是冰心。文中主要讲了一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上唱歌、孩子们用弹弓大中了小鸟，两只老鸟接住了小鸟把它带回巢中。从此孩子们再也听不到小鸟的叫声。文章批评了不爱护鸟类的行为，歌颂了亲情的伟大。

教学目标：

1、学习本课生字新词，理解课文内容。

2、正确流利地朗读课文，学习总结课文内容，并结合课文练习概括每个自然段的意思。

3、按照指定意思为课文划分层次。

4、继续学习抓住重点词语、边读边想象的学习方法。

教学重点：学习总结课文内容，学习概括每一自然段的大意，学习为课文划分层次。

教学难点：学习抓住重点词语、边读边想象的学习方法。

教学准备：多媒体教学光盘自制ppt课件

教学课时：一课时

教学过程：

一、导入。

1、同学们，你们喜欢鸟儿吗？你最喜欢什么鸟儿？

2、鸟儿是人类的朋友，它们和人类的生活息息相关。我们的世界因为有了鸟儿的存在显得生机勃勃，因为有了鸟儿的存在显得绚丽多彩。今天，让我们再次走进《一只小鸟》一课，共同关注一只小鸟的命运。

3、生齐读课题。

二、学习课文1、2自然段。

1、通过上节课的学习，大家对课文有了大致的了解，相信文中的一只小鸟给大家留下了一定的印象，下面请同学们自学课文1、2自然段。

出示自学提示：

用自己喜欢的方式再读读课文1、2自然段，思考：这是一只（）的小鸟。

2、交流汇报

这是一只可爱的、幼小的、快乐的、幸福的、爱唱歌、歌声动听的、爱欣赏风景的小鸟。

你从哪些词句中看出来？

3、多美的景致，多可爱的小鸟，再加上小鸟清脆柔美的歌声，这是一副多么美丽、和谐的自然图画啊！让我们怀着美好的心情齐读课文1、2自然段。

三、学习课文3--6自然段。

鸟儿欢快的歌声吸引了树下玩乐的孩子，他们天天来听小鸟唱歌。可是有一天，一件令人心痛的事情发生了。

1、请同学们快速默读课文3至6自然段，画出自己感受最深的句子，并在旁边批注自己的体会或感受。

2、汇报交流。

（ 1）它正要发声，忽然"啪"的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去。

从这句话看出小鸟的伤势很严重，"跌"是完全失去控制，很重地摔下来。抓住重点词指导朗读。

（ 2）斜刺里两老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

从这句话能够看出老鸟对小鸟非常关爱，体会到亲情的伟大。"箭也似的"像箭一样快，说明它们此时此刻内心非常着急。抓住"箭也似的"指导朗读。

师：拿一位母亲不爱自己的孩子？哪一位母亲能眼睁睁地看着自己的孩子受到伤害？此时的它们心急如焚，此时的它们肝肠寸断，我们怎样才能读出老鸟当时那种急切、悲伤的心情呢？

自己试读，指名读，评议，齐读。

（3）它的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来。

从这句话体会到小鸟的伤势很重可能有生命危险……

师：刚才还活蹦乱跳、高声鸣唱的小鸟转眼间正痛苦地流着血，正面临着死亡的威胁，你觉得此时是一只怎样的小鸟？（可怜的、不幸的、痛苦的、命运悲惨的……）

是啊！这是多么令人心痛的一幕啊！你能带着这种感受读好这句话吗？

试读，指名读，齐读。

五、学习课文7、8自然段。

1、此时此刻，假如你就是那些孩子中的一员，当你看见小的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来，它的生命即将结束，你会怎么想？

指名说。

2、因为孩子的一时贪玩，让这么可爱无辜的小生命受到了伤害，让我们齐读最后两个自然段，边读边体会此时孩子们的心情。

3、文中的孩子们喜欢这只鸟吗？从什么地方可以看出？他们对小鸟的爱和老鸟对小鸟的爱有什么不同？

点生汇报。

师：小孩的爱是自私的，爱的方式不对，爱它就让它更加自由，爱它就应该让它更加快乐，爱它就让它更加美丽，爱不是占有。

六、拓展延伸，情感升华。

1、故事讲到这里，你明白了什么？如果让你对文中的孩子说几句话，你会说些什么？

2、师：听了你们这番话，相信那些调皮的孩子们会放下手中的弹弓，以一颗善心和爱心去对待鸟类。老师也想对文中的孩子们说几句话，可以吗？

出示白居易的《鸟》诗。

谁道群生性命微，一般骨肉一般皮。

劝君莫打枝头鸟，子在巢中望母归。

岂止是"子在巢中望母归",同样还有"母在巢中盼子归",古人尚且明白这个道理，何况我们今天的少年儿童呢？让我们一起读一读这首诗，向所有的人发出"莫打枝头鸟"呼声吧！

七、总结。

美丽鸟儿，美丽的生活，美丽的大自然，都需要我们用心去呵护，真正的喜爱不是占有，不是破坏，而是让美丽的事物更加美丽，让美丽的世界更加美丽。我们相信：只要人人都献出一点爱，世界将变成美好的人间

作业：每一只美丽的小鸟都对世界充满了幻想和希望，但文中的这只小鸟却怎么也没有想由于人类的贪婪使它惨遭不幸。小鸟的命运牵动着每个人的心，大家想像一下，那只小鸟后来怎么样了？续写一段话。

教学资源：

为了更合理的、恰当的用好多媒体资源，有效的服务于教学活动，真正的起到辅助作用，在本节课设计之后，我广搜资源，分别从网络上、远教资源库上、多媒体教学光盘上大量的参考整理，最后一句我本节课的教学目标、重点难点，最终选用了多媒体教学光盘和自制的幻灯片课件。光盘中我选用了词语的出示和第一部分的动画播放，这两个部分能较好的突破本节课的难点，并激发学生参与学习的积极性。自制课件我为了更好的指导学生学会总结段意和划分层次，就用课件为他们展示出了一些学法指导，学生在自读课文的时候，可以参考学习，减轻学生的学习压力，起到了引导与自学的作用。

一只小鸟课件【篇8】

活动目标：

1．学习童谣，感受数字童谣的特点。

2．尝试正确使用量词，并根据童谣中动物发出的声音进行创编，体验创编童谣的乐趣。

活动准备：

1．每人一个贴绒动物(小鸟、喜鹊、麻雀、青蛙、鸭子、蛤蟆、小猪、河马、小马、毛驴等)。

2．与童谣内容有关的一定数量的动物卡片一套。

活动过程：

1．感受童谣内容。

(1)自由地向同伴介绍自选的贴绒小动物，并用声音或动作表示动物的主要特征。

(2)集体讨论各种动物的叫声或走路的动作。

★指导语：你的动物朋友是谁？它是怎样唱歌、走路的？

2．学习童谣。

(1)根据动物的数量顺序学习童谣，正确使用量词。

★指导语：这里有哪些小动物？各有多少？

(2)出示娃娃的图片，学习童谣最后两句。

★指导语：小朋友高兴的时候会怎么样？

(3)幼儿边做动作边念童谣。

3．尝试根据童谣中动物发出的声音进行创编，正确使用量词。

一只小鸟课件【篇9】

教学目的：

1、激发学生学习语文兴趣，使学生感受亲情的伟大并懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2、有感情地朗读课文，表演课文，培养学生的想象力和说话能力。

3、认读本课生字新词。

教学重点、难点：

1、充分朗读的基础上，培养学生的想象力和说话能力，感受亲情的伟大。

2、有感情地朗读课文，感受亲情的伟大，树立爱护鸟类的意识。

教具准备：

1、课件

2、小鸟、两只老鸟头饰

教学过程：

一、课件演示，激趣揭题。

1、课件演示，学生背诵有关课前搜集的有关鸟类的古诗。

2、简介冰心，激趣揭题。

二、初读课文，整体感知。

1、自读课文，自学生字新词。

2、四人小组进行读词竞赛，出示词语，让生认读。

3、再读课文，边读边思考，这是一只怎样的小鸟？文中是如何描写的，划出有关句词。

三、直奔重点段落，读文感悟。

1、出示三至八自然段，让学生找出课文中感受最深的地方，认真地读。

2、老师巡视；交流感受。

3、出示句子比较，品析。

斜刺里两只老鸟飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

（1）比较句子的不同之处。

（2）朗读，想象，感悟亲情的伟大。

4、有谁也喜欢这只可爱的小鸟？朗读三至六自然段，划出相关句子。从天天等词中感悟。

（1）思考：老鸟的爱和小孩的爱有什么不同？

（2）再次朗读三至六自然段。

（3）出示联系，小组学习。

小鸟的歌声消失了，小鸟可能，小鸟可能。

5、学习有关小鸟快乐的段落，教师相机指导感情朗读。

6、讨论：如果你是那个孩子，再也听不到小鸟的歌声，你有什么感想？

7、带头饰表演课文内容，可发挥想象。

四、想象，拓展延伸。

小鸟后来怎样了？续写一段话。

五、布置作业。

1、四人小组合作制作一张爱护鸟类手抄报。

2、读相关冰心奶奶的作品。

一只小鸟课件【篇10】

一、教材分析：

此课是在《鸟和家禽》、《鸟的纹样》、《水墨画鸟》、《我做的鸟和家禽》基础上的一堂“综合、探索”课。像一只小鸟在天空中自由翱翔，是每个孩子的梦想。本课抓住学生这一心理，利用生活中废弃的材料，从色彩、造型、巧妙的搭配入手，创意性地把自己装扮成一只小小鸟，从而完成教学任务。

本课是在"变废为宝、变废为美"的美术教学新观念下一次革新性的创作会活动。

二、教学目标：

(1)认知目标:进一步了解鸟的外形特征，培养学生的造型概括能力。

(2操作目标:能综合多种废旧材料设计和制作鸟的形象。

(3)情感目标:激发学生热爱大自然、关爱小动物的情感，体验游戏带来的快乐，感受自己制作作品的美及成功的喜悦。

三、教学重难点：

教学重点:如何有选择地利用一定的废旧材料把自己装扮成一只鸟。

教学难点:能够综合废旧材料进行组合创作，造型美观、别致。

四、教学准备：

师生共同准备:a．各种废旧材料(瓶、罐、纸箱、纸板等)。

b 手工制作工具(剪刀、胶水、双面胶、订书机、胶棒等)。

c 各种绘画工具(颜料、画笔、调色盒等)，以及抹布等整理收拾工具。

五、教学过程：

利用前两节课中有关鸟的创作作品，来说说鸟的形象特征。

将师生共同准备的废旧材料，分放于教室四周，根据自己带的材料，学生介绍自已的创作意图。

以小组为单位，根据部分学生的创作意图，讨论设计方案的可行性。

讨论问题:

1 制作的成品是否安全?

2 色彩搭配是否吸引h?

3 如何合理利用不同质地的废旧材料来制作鸟的各个部分?

欣赏:

l 一组有关鸟类的卡通真人秀造型，从色彩、造型等方面引导学生观察。

2 历届学生的鸟类化装造型图片或书本上学生的学习活动图片。

教师以鸟的其一部分进行示范制作，也可以让学生参与制作，共同完成。

作业设计:以小组为单位，设计制作一件以鸟为主题的造型作品。

巡回指导:

l 及时协调学生的合作意识。

2 重点指导部分学生的细节制作。

3 友情提醒:注意美工刀的安全使用，注意胶棒的正确使用。

4 提供有关鸟的图片，协助学生搞好创作。

展示活动:在教室中央，搭建"舞台"，进行鸟的真人秀表演，在座的学生组成"小小评讲团"，进行评议(根据色彩、造型、表演等方面)。

一只小鸟课件【篇11】

活动目标：

1、 培养幼儿热爱大自然，爱护小动物的情感。

2、 理解儿歌内容，学习仿编诗歌。

3、 学习词汇“飞飞，刨刨、跳跳、游游、跑跑、笑笑”

活动准备：

字卡、小动物图片、儿歌录音带

活动过程：

1、随着活泼快乐的音乐，教师带领幼儿跳舞进入教室。

2、今天天气真好，我们班上也来了许多小动物。v教师把小动物图片贴于黑板上，供幼儿观察w

一、观察图片，理解儿歌

1、图片有哪些小动物？v根据幼儿回答，教师翻字卡,认识字宝宝w

识字游戏：请幼儿给小动物们找到的正确的名字，将字宝宝贴在相对应的动物图片上。

2、 小动物们都在干什么？请小朋友们学一学？

3、 小动物们还有一首儿歌，让我们听一听v听的过程中，教 师指图提示w

4、 你听到了谁？在做什么？都学谁？

5、 一起跟录音表演儿歌。

二、引导幼儿仿编诗歌

1、你还知道哪些小动物？

2、你们可以跟它学什么？

3、你能用和诗里一样的话说出来吗？

三、集体把自己编的儿歌表演一遍。

结束：教师带领幼儿学小鸟自由的飞向大自然。

一只小鸟课件【篇12】

教学目的：

1、激发学生学习语文兴趣，使学生感受亲情的伟大并懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2、有感情地朗读课文，表演课文，培养学生的想象力和说话能力。

3、认读本课生字新词。

教学重点、难点：

1、充分朗读的基础上，培养学生的想象力和说话能力，感受亲情的伟大。

2、有感情地朗读课文，感受亲情的伟大，树立爱护鸟类的意识。

教具准备：

1、课件

2、小鸟、两只老鸟头饰

教学过程：

一、课件演示，激趣揭题。

1、课件演示，学生背诵有关课前搜集的有关鸟类的古诗。

2、简介冰心，激趣揭题。

二、初读课文，整体感知。

1、自读课文，自学生字新词。

2、四人小组进行读词竞赛，出示词语，让生认读。

3、再读课文，边读边思考，这是一只怎样的小鸟？文中是如何描写的，划出有关句词。

三、直奔重点段落，读文感悟。

1、出示三至八自然段，让学生找出课文中感受最深的地方，认真地读。

2、老师巡视;交流感受。

3、出示句子比较，品析。

斜刺里两只老鸟飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

（1）比较句子的不同之处。

（2）朗读，想象，感悟亲情的伟大。

4、有谁也喜欢这只可爱的小鸟？朗读三至六自然段，划出相关句子。从天天等词中感悟。

（1）思考：老鸟的爱和小孩的爱有什么不同？

（2）再次朗读三至六自然段。

（3）出示联系，小组学习。

小鸟的歌声消失了，小鸟可能，小鸟可能。

5、学习有关小鸟快乐的段落，教师相机指导感情朗读。

6、讨论：如果你是那个孩子，再也听不到小鸟的歌声，你有什么感想？

7、带头饰表演课文内容，可发挥想象。

四、想象，拓展延伸。

小鸟后来怎样了？续写一段话。

五、布置作业。

1、四人小组合作制作一张爱护鸟类手抄报。

2、读相关冰心奶奶的作品。

教学设计意图

本文讲述的故事和学生生活十分贴近，可唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，又是一篇进行口语交际的好材料，本课没有难理解的词，因此，我把教学重点放在第三至八自然段，通过反复的朗读，表演课文，巧设情境，激发学生说话兴趣，从而懂得爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。培养学生的形象思维能力和创造力，提高每个学生的口语交际能力。

2024植树的感想50字(收藏十篇)

我们从一些事情上得到感悟后，通常就可以写10篇心得体会将其记下来，如此就可以提升我们写作能力了。相信许多人会觉得心得体会很难写吧，以下是小编收集整理的植树造林心得体会，欢迎阅读与收藏。

2024植树的感想50字 篇1

为深入贯彻落实植树造林志愿服务大行动的活动，创建环境优美、生态和谐的生活环境，提高城市文化品位，结合实际，我社区以“3.12”植树节为契机，扎实落实文明办精神，现将活动情况简要总结如下：

一、成立植树造林志愿者工作领导小组

为加强社区绿化工作管理，加快绿色社区建设步伐，经党政研究决定，特成立社区绿化办公室，由社区领导负责，建立健全发展机制，确保中心绿化工作的发展与落实。

二、具体活动

1、强化宣传，增强宣传力度。社区通过多种形式强化宣传，在居民中形成强大的宣传攻势，为植树活动做好了充分的舆论准备。将植树造林的意识深深地根植于居民心中，并且在社区宣传栏介绍植树造林等相关知识，极大地提高居民对植树节的了解和植树的热情。

2、相关植树活动。社区工作人员组织志愿者们在绿化带及花池内共栽松树20棵、紫薇和玉兰共计50余棵。通过开展植树造林等相关活动，增强了全体居民强烈的环保意识。植树节期间，约二十名志愿者带着劳动工具，将社区活动场所及小区一些卫生死角彻底地清理干净。本次活动中，志愿者积极主动，为社区做出了自己应有的贡献，也将环保意识传递到每个人的心中。

通过广大志愿者在参与“关爱自然、义务植树”绿化活动中，不仅增强了个人的绿化意识、环保意识，同时也提高了个人素质，达到了为社区、企业和社会增添绿色，净化、美化环境的目的。今年的植树节，让我们的绿色城市更美、更和谐！

2024植树的感想50字 篇2

长假结束上班第一天，领导叫我参加县里组织的植树活动。于是与单位同事一行三人来到了我们单位的植树点。我记得植树节是3月12日，是以孙中山先生与世长辞之日定为我国的植树节的，今年的.植树比往年提早了一点，这或许是因为年假天干物燥，烧山平平发生，加之天气预报说近日有雨所以提早了。

这是我参加工作后第一次参加的植树活动。小时候参加植树活动时觉得只是一次春游，因为路程远还要带上干粮什么的，反正玩玩就回来了，这一次的植树活动让我感触颇多。每个来到植树点的人都很自觉地拿起铁锹挖坑栽树，当我搬运树苗时，更感觉到自己手臂的力量的不足，有的人还为讨个彩头，边种树边念叨：栽下一颗发财树，今年一定发大财。十年树木，百年树人。在路边的这一片荒地上，我们种上了将近上百棵小树苗，才过立春，就为那片土地增加了些春的气息，为这个城市带来了些绿色！植树活动进行得迅速而顺利，虽然种下的桉树参差不齐，大小不一，但一棵棵都种得很正，昂首挺胸，我在心里想，希望树苗能够存活下去，等到若干年后，我们从这里经过时，看见浓郁的树木，成就感将油然升起。

森林是地球的肺，由此引申，树木对于世界不啻于肺泡对于人体，微不足道却又举足轻重。 每年的植树节，国家都投入了大量的人力物力，植树节的诞生，也是一些国家为激发人们爱林、造林的感情，促进国土绿化，保护人类赖以生存的生态环境所采取的一项有力措施，希望明年还有机会来，再看看我们亲手种下的树木，是不是依然挺拔，依然美丽……

2024植树的感想50字 篇3

阳光灿烂的我们9点集合完毕后，就浩浩荡荡的来到了植树场地，由社会实践委员联系好的一处场地，正好在我们的寝室下面，这样选择主要是方便男生同学的同时也希望我们能将亲手种下的树照顾好。

尽管人很多，但组长们做的周到细心，他们分好组，井然有序地把树苗分发给每个小组，并嘱咐大家要小心行事。安排妥当后，大家都干劲十足的忙活起来。

此时的我们心里满是快乐与轻松，很快一棵棵树苗耸立与春土中，以昂扬的姿态向世界宣布了自己的一片立足之地。此后，它们会吸天地之灵气，大地之精华来使自己更加茁壮的成长，长成参天大树!这不正象征着我们这新一代的国家未来接班人吗?我们就是在社会的爱护与培养中茁壮的成长中。此时我们应该做的就是努力吸取科学文化知识，积极参加社会实践活动，努力提高自身文化品德修养，争取作个二十一世纪的合格人才!

春和日丽，万里无云，在广袤的中华大地上，有一个地方一群有着美好希望与梦想，心怀感恩的阳光灿烂青春年华的少男少女们正在快乐的忙活着。

此时的他们是最可爱的，说笑着，忙活着，着不得不让人承认是一道别有风味的风景线!

看啊!阿姨脸上露出满意的笑容，同学脸上显露欣慰与自豪的表情。三点多完工大家排队打道回府。一路沐浴在阳光的爱河里，树儿也友好的向我们招手示意。

大家对这次活动都感触颇深，皆感慨万千，可以说这次活动不仅拉进了大家的心，使我们的大家庭体会到了团结的重要。更使我们的心灵得到了一次净化。

“饮水思源，取之社会，用之社会”心存感恩将永远美好，心向阳光就永远不会有阴影。让我们亲近自然，亲近社会，树下为人民服务的人生观，带着自己的使命与信念更加坚定地前进!这就是我们此次活动的感想，谨共享!

2024植树的感想50字 篇4

这次的植树活动前期筹备时间只有短短的一周，从林业局批复植树地点开始，我们就开始了繁忙的工作：确定主题，策划方案，准备物料，宣传报名，联系各方面团队……大家各司其职确保活动成功举办。

在这次活动的筹备过程中，我负责的是物料准备和报名登记，虽然都是一些简单的工作，但是仍然让我连续四天未能睡一个好觉，每天晚上都要到一两点钟，白天还要早起上课，我都不知道原来我可以这么能熬。一共八百多个绿丝带，除了社团人帮忙做了100多个，其他的全部都是我自己一个人做的，因为他们时间也不多，能在一起共同做事的时间更少，而且工具有限，单纯利用谁的时间都不好，所以，自己动手吧。

但是我明白是我的问题，我在组织协调能力方面的欠缺，要成为一个好的领导者，除了具备高执行力，更重要的就是组织协调的能力了。因此，以后我要加强这一方面的锻炼。

在我看来，一次大型的社会活动，做好报名登记是很重要的，这对于整个活动的人员调配、管理以及工具配置有着很大的关系。而我统计的主要是参加竞拍会的爱心人士和学生团体，由于需要提前确认，而每个人都可能会随时发生不可预料的事，所以，确认工作并不顺利，直到3月9号都还有变卦的。同时，志愿者在联系报名人员时的表现所反映出来的问题。

2024植树的感想50字 篇5

春天，这个万物复苏，大地呈现一片欣欣向荣勃勃生机的景象的季节，万物都向人们露出春天的微笑。今天这个阳光明媚的日子，3月12日——植树节，喜欢这个充满希望的节日。喜欢想象着一粒种子生根发芽的力量和精神，喜欢感受那种催人向上的勇气。我们要执行一个特殊而又神圣的任务——植树。怀着兴奋而又期待的心情，我们班的9个同学跟学院这支植树大队开始了出发的旅途。下车后，一路来，我们一边摸索，一边探路，三十多分钟的路途并没有让我们感到疲倦。反而，一路上，我们有说有笑，连我们身边空气都显得异常的温馨、愉快。

到了目的地，看到属于我们班的小树苗，我们的任务是要赋予她神圣的生命。咨询一下负责安排我们的工作人员，种树需要什么注意事项。了解之后，我们不顾一路的疲惫，擦擦额头的汗水，就不约而同的拿起工具，开始了我们的任务。首先，我们要把我们要种的'树搬移到我们要种的目的地，到达了目的地，不论男生还是女生，我们都开始动手挖坑，锄的锄，铲的铲，干得热火朝天，等我们挖得差不多，我们拿小树苗去衡量够不够大、够不够深。然后把树苗放进去，扶正，盖上泥土。拍拍手，我们完工了。好像遗忘了什么。哦，原来是忘了浇水。虽然前两天都是雨天，泥土还是湿润，但我们把我们喝的矿泉水浇上去。

在植树节种下一棵小树苗，种下希望和快乐，希望它会迎着春风茁壮成长，当夏天到来的时候，可以郁郁葱葱地为我们遮挡阳光，当秋天到来的时候，可以给我们送来秋天的气息;当冬天到来的时候，可以带给我们心灵的温暖。

“饮水思源，取之社会，用之社会”带着这份感恩与社会赋予我们的使命，我们做完了一件有意义的事——挖坑、种树、浇水，为我们的生活的环境做了我们力所能及的事情，我们都感觉到有一种成功感的喜悦，绿树成荫，鸟语花香，是我们的期望。眼前这棵幼苗，我们用我们爱心作成长的水分，用我们的爱心作为成长的营养成份，日复一日的盼它早日茁壮成长，成为大树，为我们共同的家增添一份绿意，为美化环境增添一份小小的力量。

2024植树的感想50字 篇6

恰逢植树节，我们学校专门举办了植树节的活动，我们班的所有同学都是在老师的带领安排下参加了这一次的植树节校园植树活动。早上上完第二节课，我们在老师的带领下我们坐车到了一块林地，这里能够看出来之前是有过树的，因为有许多树被烧了的痕迹。老师跟我们说这里之前是一块山林，但是有一个人抽烟乱扔烟头，然后弄得这里着火被烧了，这才变成现在这样子的。听老师的介绍，我心情挺不高兴的，要是这里没有被烧的话，现在是春节说不定有许多的树会开花，五颜六色，肯定非常的好看，哪像现在这样荒芜，旁边的数目还是一片被烧之后凄惨的样子，所以心里对乱扔烟头的那个人有一点点狠。

在老师的教导下，我们开始了自己的植树工作。因为之前在学校的时候就已经分好小组和工作任务了，所以我们按照自己的组开始了自己的工作。我们组加上我总共才两个男孩子，所以挖土弄出一个坑的工作自然就交给了我，另外一个男孩子则是去水管那边提水过来浇树。很快在大家的写作下面，我们组的工作就完成的差不多了，我挖好坑，一个女孩子将树放进土了，另外一个女孩子用铲子将土重新埋回去盖住树的根部，然后浇上水就完成的差不多了。令我吃惊的是，因为水管的`长度有限，所以提水的地方有点远，所以提水是另外一个男生和一个女生一起提回来的，这让我对女生刮目相看，果然啊，女生也是一样的很厉害，我们不能够小瞧她们的。

作为一个南方的孩子，我已经很久没有看到过雪了在我的印象当中我只见过两次雪，一次是我很小的时候，还有一次就是三四年前了，那个时候我跟爸妈在扣下堆了一个大大的雪人，我们还给她戴上了一个小帽子，特别的好看，所以啊我是特比喜欢雪的。老师告诉我们之前这边的冬天也是下雪的，但是现在以为环境的变化所以冬天下雪的机率变小了，而我们每一个人做到爱护环境，保护好绿色的话就能够改善好环境。所以我们这一次的植树结植树的活动就是为了这个目的，只要我们保护好植被，种上一定数量的树，我相信我们的环境一定会变得越来越好的，我也一定能够在冬天的时候继续欣赏雪景，尽情的玩雪球了。

这一次的植树节活动虽然时间非常的短暂，但是真的让我认识到了，只要我们每一个人多一点对绿色环境的爱护，每一个人都能够种一颗树，我相信我们的环境也肯定能够变的更加美丽。

2024植树的感想50字 篇7

春天是孕育生命的季节，一切大号生命都在萌芽阶段。x月x日下午我班开展了一次以“呵护环境，奉献绿色”为主题的植树活动，此次活动开展的地点在钟坡山，钟坡山地势较高，不仅能让大家从植树活动中感受到快乐，而且还能亲近大自然，培养同学们热爱大自然的情趣，从而增强保护环境的意识。

当班委会向全班同学宣布在x月x日开展植树活动时，同学们都反应热烈，积极响应，并有很多同学不断询问这次植树活动的相关信息及具体的安排，希望在这特别的日子里表达出对美好大自然的热爱以及对本次活动的支持。但这次活动的主题是“呵护环境，奉献绿色”，希望通过这次植树活动，使大家能更加积极主动的去关注环境问题，从我做起，从身边的小事做起，爱护环境，保护地球，为美化我们的家园贡献自己的力量。

本次活动由材料x班的主要班干负责。活动开展的很成功。x月x日中午x点全体同学在学校大门口集合，集体乘车出发，于x点x到达预定地点。到达目的地之后，同学们都表现很积极，而且很偶秩序，按照先前的分组，很快就开始了植树，有的挖坑，有的植树苗，大家干劲十足和一致的团结协作，很快就将所带的树苗植完了。x点钟集体乘车返校。

对于这次植树活动，同学们都觉得意义非常。不但植树造林，美化环境而且加强了班级间的交流，增进了同学间的了解，加深了彼此的`友谊。更重要的是，通过这次植树及对环境问题和植树知识的宣传，使得大家更加认识到环境的重要性，切实投身“呵护环境”的行动中来，为我们的美好家园“奉献绿色”，贡献自己的一份力量。

2024植树的感想50字 篇8

今天是植树节，很多人都去植树了，植树的目的是为了增加绿化，保护环境，但是单凭植树节植树就能改善我们的生活环境吗?我们要做的还不止这些。

朋友你去过云南吗?那里的天空高远深旷，明净亮丽，蓝蓝的天，洁白的云构成了一幅优美的画卷;朋友你去过江南的水乡吗?那里的空气是那样的清新，深呼一口气你会感到无比的舒畅，小桥流水追随着你的足迹，水是那样的洁净，你可以清晰的看见水底的沙石。而在淄博却不能看到过这样如画一般的风景，我多么希望我们淄博也能随处可见亮丽的风景呀!这时我就想大声疾呼：让我们共同保护环境吧!

我们的城市是一座老工业城市，每天大大小小的工厂排放着各种烟气，污染着我们的空气环境，危害着我们的身体健康。我们连自己赖以生存的环境都保护不了，我们还在拼命忙些什么?有什么比健康还重要呢?

我很茫然，我们既然能在垃圾堆、废弃地上创造出奇迹，把城市建设这么好，经济发展这么迅速，我们为什么不能保护好环境呢?难道经济发展和环境保护不能兼得?不是的，我们完全有能力改善环境，只是还缺少一些行动，这是我们每个人的义务和责任。虽然我们不能阻止汽车尾气的排放，不能让那些工厂不再污染空气，但是我们能从身边的小事做起，倡导绿色出行，带动身边人一起保护环境，将我们的环保热情汇集，同样会产生无穷大的力量。

携起手来，让我们象爱自己的家一样，爱我们的城市，让我们的城市环境更美好!

2024植树的感想50字 篇9

阳春三月，大地复苏，春意盎然，恰是植树的好时机。与此同时，象征着孕育绿色生命的植树节也应运而至。为了给我们的家园增添更多绿色，进一步提高同学们对国土绿化重要性的认识，坚持生态、经济、社会协调发展的科学发展观，作为山东工会管理干部学院青年志愿者协会的成员，我们把握时机，精心策划、准备，开展了20xx年爱心植树活动，并取得了圆满成功。

青年志愿者协会于20xx年3月11日在济南市长清区林业局的协调下与长清各区直属机关共同在长清区文昌街办事处三龙村开展了植树造林活动。

这次植树活动得到了会计系团委老师的大力支持,同时在会计系学生会的协调,组织了14级青协干事28,会计系09级班长、团支书12人共计40人，一起参加这次活动。大家三人一小组，合作进行植树，各个青年志愿者表现出了极大的积极性，领到工具后，大家争相动手，分工合作，有条不紊的完成了任务。所有志愿者都发扬了不怕脏、不怕累的精神，为保护和改善生态环境作出了努力。这些新绿的小树为我们祖国增添了一道绿色风景线。在活动中，同学们表现积极，服从安排，认真高质量的完成了植树任务。

此次活动得到了林业局以及当地群众的一致好评，并取得了圆满成功。

植树是为了环保，为了保护地球母亲。虽然我们每个人所能贡献的.力量是有限的，但是我们大家每一个人贡献一份力量，大家的力量加起来也是一笔不小的财富，团结的力量是巨大的。此次活动为加强青年志愿者各项能力的培养提供了一个很好的平台。各位青年志愿者共同协作，较好地培养了大家的合作意识和团队精神。

通过这次活动，让大家以实际行动来为济南的环境作出自己的贡献，增强同学们的环境保护意识，同时也培养同学们互相合作的团队精神，增进同学之间的友谊，培养了大家的责任感。

2024植树的感想50字 篇10

植树节，我们种树去！大家都觉得这个主意好，于是他自告奋勇地给都市报写了一封信，表达了我们全体团员的心声。都市报不仅登了这封信，而且马上联系了种树的地点明阳天下拓展植树基地，部署了行动方案。

今天是3月12日植树节，我们8：30到指定地点集合。我停好车，远远就看见市府路上停着两辆大巴，身着黄色休闲服的记者黄小玲手拿名单在招呼大家上车。我登上了第二辆大巴，看到我们的团长叶育登院长和美女小余已经在车上，见了我热情招呼我在一旁坐下。车里的其他人都不认识。今天市民考察团的一百名成员到了八十多位，很多人都是第一次相遇。

车子在经过快到植树地点的时时候，看到指数点的广场上早已排起了长长的队伍，前来植树，我们看了红色的大横幅得知，是百户家庭植树活动。今天植树节，看来有很多团体都在忙于种树哦。很快车子停在了响水湖植树基地的停车场，我们下车进了基地，在一座石桥上集中，分成四大组。我分在第三组，跟叶院长、陈建秋、小余等人一个组。我们热情高涨。基地的工作人员热情地接待了我们，给我们介绍了这次种树的场所，竟然是跟市领导种的地方相邻呢，接着园林技术人员给我们讲解种树的注意事项和程序。两个小伙子各扛着一面“市民考察团”的旗帜，站在队伍的正前方，记者和部分团友忙着拍照。我们每人领取免费的树苗，然后排队进场。

场地上已经为我们准备了铁锹、镐、锄等农具，还有浇水用的塑料桶。在一片覆盖着新黄土的旷地上，用白线画出一个个圆圈，圈里有张小纸片，白纸红字，分别写着领取的树名。我们拿起镐和锹，开始挖坑，然后三四个人一起抬着树苗，把树苗扶正，接着培土、踏实、浇水。大家干得热火朝天，情绪激昂。一个多小时后，这块空地上已经成了一片小树林。我们按既定计划，种好了树，大家都说，我们会经常来明阳天下拓展植树基地看看这些树的，还打算到时搞周年庆。